1 #LyX 2.3 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
5 \save_transient_properties true
6 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/
9 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
11 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
12 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
13 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
14 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
15 % the documentation team
16 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
18 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
19 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
21 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
22 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
23 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
24 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
26 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
30 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
31 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
33 % for customized page headers/footers
34 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
36 % change header rule width
37 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
39 % used to have extra space in table cells
40 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
41 {\usepackage{array}}{}
42 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
44 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
45 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
46 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
48 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
50 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
51 \use_default_options false
57 \maintain_unincluded_children false
59 \language_package default
62 \font_roman "lmodern" "default"
63 \font_sans "lmss" "default"
64 \font_typewriter "lmtt" "default"
65 \font_math "auto" "auto"
66 \font_default_family default
67 \use_non_tex_fonts false
70 \font_sf_scale 100 100
71 \font_tt_scale 100 100
73 \use_dash_ligatures false
75 \default_output_format pdf2
77 \bibtex_command bibtex
78 \index_command makeindex
82 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
83 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
87 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
88 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
89 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
94 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
95 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
98 \use_package amsmath 1
99 \use_package amssymb 1
100 \use_package cancel 1
102 \use_package mathdots 1
103 \use_package mathtools 1
104 \use_package mhchem 1
105 \use_package stackrel 1
106 \use_package stmaryrd 1
107 \use_package undertilde 1
109 \cite_engine_type default
113 \paperorientation portrait
118 \notefontcolor #0000ff
135 \paragraph_separation skip
138 \math_numbering_side default
139 \quotes_style english
143 \paperpagestyle default
144 \tracking_changes false
145 \output_changes false
149 \author -712698321 "Jürgen Spitzmüller"
161 by the \SpecialChar LyX
166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
168 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
169 send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
170 Documentation mailing list:
171 \begin_inset CommandInset href
173 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
185 \begin_inset Newline newline
189 \begin_inset Newline newline
193 \begin_inset Note Note
196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
197 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
198 \begin_inset Newline newline
203 https://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/Manuals#UserGuide
211 \begin_layout Standard
212 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
213 LatexCommand tableofcontents
220 \begin_layout Chapter
224 \begin_layout Section
225 What is \SpecialChar LyX
229 \begin_layout Standard
231 is a document preparation system.
232 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
233 scripts, publishable books, business
234 letters and proposals, and even poetry.
235 It is unlike most other
236 \begin_inset Quotes eld
240 \begin_inset Quotes erd
243 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
245 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
246 \begin_inset Quotes eld
250 \begin_inset Quotes erd
254 \begin_inset Quotes eld
258 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
261 pt type, left justified, 5
262 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
266 \begin_inset Quotes erd
271 takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
275 \begin_layout Standard
276 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
281 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
285 \begin_layout Standard
290 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
291 's philosophy: most importantly,
292 the format of all of the manuals.
293 If you don't read it, you will have a bear of a time navigating this manual.
294 You might also be better served looking in one of the other manuals instead
300 manual describes that, too.
303 \begin_layout Section
308 \begin_layout Standard
309 Like most applications, \SpecialChar LyX
310 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its
312 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
313 There is, of course, a vertical scrollbar and a main work area for editing
317 \begin_layout Standard
318 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
319 This is not a bug or an oversight, but intentional.
320 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
322 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
323 only a vertical scrollbar.
324 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
325 The first case is large images.
326 To avoid them being displayed larger than your screen, left click on the
327 image and use the option
338 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
341 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through the table, but
342 this doesn't work for equations yet.
345 \begin_layout Standard
346 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
347 menus and toolbar buttons, have a look at
353 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
355 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
362 \begin_layout Section
366 \begin_layout Standard
367 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
369 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
371 Just select the manual you want to read from the
378 \begin_layout Section
379 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
381 \begin_inset CommandInset label
383 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
390 \begin_layout Standard
391 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
392 can be configured via the menu
394 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
398 \begin_inset Index idx
401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
408 is able to inspect your system to see what programs, \SpecialChar LaTeX
410 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
411 packages are available.
412 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
414 Although this configuration has already been done when \SpecialChar LyX
416 your system, you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
417 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
421 \begin_inset space \space{}
424 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
425 classes, and which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
427 To force \SpecialChar LyX
428 to re-inspect your system, you should use
430 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
434 \begin_inset Index idx
437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
438 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
444 You should then restart \SpecialChar LyX
445 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
448 \begin_layout Section
451 \begin_inset CommandInset label
453 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
460 \begin_layout Standard
461 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
462 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
463 installed, but you will not be
464 able to create PDFs or print your documents unless you do have it installed.
465 However, some \SpecialChar LyX
466 documents use DocBook as the “backend” that can produce
467 PDFs and the like, and every \SpecialChar LyX
468 document can always be output as plain text
472 \begin_layout Standard
473 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
474 or DocBook classes or packages.
475 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
476 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
479 \begin_layout Standard
480 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
481 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
482 has found on your system are listed in a file you can
485 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
493 If you are missing packages you need, then you must install them and then
494 reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
497 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
501 \begin_inset Index idx
504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
505 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
513 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
520 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
524 \begin_layout Chapter
525 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
529 \begin_layout Section
530 Basic File Operations
531 \begin_inset Index idx
534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
543 \begin_layout Standard
548 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations for any word processor
549 in addition to some more advanced operations:
552 \begin_layout Itemize
574 \begin_layout Itemize
590 arg "buffer-new-template"
596 \begin_layout Itemize
618 \begin_layout Itemize
628 \begin_layout Itemize
642 \begin_layout Itemize
664 \begin_layout Itemize
676 arg "buffer-write-as"
682 \begin_layout Itemize
696 \begin_layout Itemize
710 \begin_layout Standard
711 They all do pretty much the same thing as in other word processors, with
712 a few minor differences.
715 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
726 command lists the available templates.
727 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
728 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
729 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
735 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
737 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
744 \begin_layout Standard
745 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
754 \begin_inset Quotes eld
758 \begin_inset Quotes erd
762 \begin_inset Quotes eld
766 \begin_inset Quotes erd
770 \begin_inset Quotes eld
774 \begin_inset Quotes erd
777 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
778 to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank space
779 is just that — a big, blank space.
787 \begin_layout Standard
808 are useful if more people work on the same document at the same time.
812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
813 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
816 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar endofsentence
834 will reload the document from disk.
835 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
836 and want to restore it to the last save.
845 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
846 them as your changes.
849 \begin_layout Section
850 Basic Editing Features
851 \begin_inset Index idx
854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
861 \begin_inset CommandInset label
863 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
870 \begin_layout Standard
871 Like most modern word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
872 can perform cut and paste operations
873 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
874 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
875 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
876 editing features and how to access
878 We will start with cut and paste.
881 \begin_layout Standard
882 As you might expect, the
886 menu and the standard toolbar has the cut and paste commands, along with
887 various other editing features.
888 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
892 \begin_layout Itemize
898 \begin_inset Index idx
901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
930 \begin_layout Itemize
936 \begin_inset Index idx
939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
968 \begin_layout Itemize
974 \begin_inset Index idx
977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1002 \begin_layout Itemize
1006 \begin_inset space ~
1012 \begin_layout Itemize
1016 \begin_inset space ~
1022 \begin_layout Itemize
1026 \begin_inset space ~
1030 \begin_inset space ~
1036 \begin_inset Index idx
1039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1048 \begin_inset Index idx
1051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1066 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
1076 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1082 \begin_layout Standard
1083 The first three are self-explanatory.
1084 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1085 and other programs by
1106 put text in two versions into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted),
1107 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1112 supports formatted and unformatted text as well, and additionally graphics.
1113 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1114 For example if the clipboard contains text in the format of comma separated
1115 values (CSV) and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1116 into individual cells.
1120 \begin_inset space ~
1125 shows you a list with the last strings you have pasted.
1126 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1130 \begin_layout Standard
1134 \begin_inset space ~
1139 contains optional items for specific formats, depending on the clipboard
1141 These include HTML, \SpecialChar LaTeX
1143 \begin_inset space ~
1150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1156 , PDF, PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1157 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1158 in different formats, and you want to select one format explicitly.
1160 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1164 \begin_inset space \space{}
1167 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1168 text which is often meaningless.) The menu item
1171 \begin_inset space ~
1174 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1176 \begin_inset space ~
1180 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1184 \begin_inset space ~
1193 , with the only difference that it acts on text only.
1194 It will insert the text in the clipboard so that the whole text is inserted
1196 A new paragraph is only started when there is a blank line in the text.
1200 \begin_inset space ~
1205 the text is inserted as paragraphs where the line breaks of the text will
1206 start a new paragraph.
1207 This is for example useful to copy contents of tables from webpages to
1208 a table in \SpecialChar LyX
1213 \begin_inset space ~
1216 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1218 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1222 \begin_inset space ~
1230 \begin_inset space ~
1233 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1236 paste from the primary selection.
1237 This is normally the currently selected text.
1240 \begin_layout Standard
1243 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1245 \begin_inset space ~
1249 \begin_inset space ~
1257 \begin_inset space ~
1261 \begin_inset space ~
1267 Once you have found a word or expression, \SpecialChar LyX
1273 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1276 \begin_inset space ~
1285 \begin_inset space ~
1290 button to skip the current word.
1294 \begin_inset space ~
1299 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1303 \begin_inset space ~
1308 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1310 If the toggle is set, searching for
1311 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1319 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1322 will not match the word
1323 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1331 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1337 Match whole words only
1339 option can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
1340 to only find complete words, e.
1341 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1345 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1353 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1357 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1365 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1370 offers also an advanced
1373 \begin_inset space ~
1377 \begin_inset space ~
1382 feature that is described in section
1383 \begin_inset space ~
1387 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1389 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1396 \begin_layout Standard
1397 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1398 \begin_inset space \space{}
1402 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1406 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1410 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1412 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1417 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1424 \begin_layout Standard
1428 arg "inset-select-all"
1431 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
1432 When the cursor is inside an inset
1435 arg "inset-select-all"
1438 selects the content of the inset.
1442 arg "inset-select-all"
1445 consecutively will increase the selection to the whole inset and then to
1450 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1453 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end
1457 \begin_layout Section
1459 \begin_inset Index idx
1462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1469 \begin_inset Index idx
1472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1479 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1481 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1488 \begin_layout Standard
1489 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1491 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1494 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1497 or the toolbar button
1503 to undo some mistake.
1504 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1506 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1509 or the toolbar button
1516 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1520 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1523 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1524 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1527 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1530 \begin_layout Standard
1531 Note that if you revert back all changes to arrive at the document as it
1533 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1537 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1540 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1541 This is a consequence of the 100
1542 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1545 step undo limit mentioned above.
1548 \begin_layout Standard
1557 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
1559 But they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by blocks
1563 \begin_layout Section
1565 \begin_inset Index idx
1568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1577 \begin_layout Standard
1578 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1581 \begin_layout Enumerate
1586 \begin_layout Itemize
1591 once anywhere in the edit window.
1592 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1596 \begin_layout Enumerate
1601 \begin_layout Itemize
1608 marks the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1611 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1614 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
1615 's buffer (and the clipboard).
1618 \begin_layout Itemize
1619 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
1622 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1629 \begin_layout Enumerate
1630 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1634 \begin_layout Standard
1635 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1636 Also check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1640 \begin_layout Section
1642 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1644 name "sec:Navigating"
1649 \begin_inset Index idx
1652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1661 \begin_layout Standard
1663 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1666 \begin_layout Itemize
1671 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1672 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1675 \begin_layout Itemize
1676 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1678 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
1680 \begin_inset space ~
1685 or by the toolbar button
1688 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1694 \begin_layout Itemize
1695 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1697 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1700 and use the same menu to return to them.
1701 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1704 \begin_layout Standard
1708 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1713 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1714 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
1716 \begin_inset space ~
1721 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1722 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1723 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
1724 your last editing position.
1727 \begin_layout Standard
1732 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
1736 \begin_layout Subsection
1738 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1740 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
1745 \begin_inset Index idx
1748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1749 Navigating ! Outline
1755 \begin_inset Index idx
1758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1767 \begin_layout Standard
1768 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1769 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1770 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1772 \begin_inset space ~
1776 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1778 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1782 ), or notes, or citations (see section
1783 \begin_inset space ~
1787 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1789 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1794 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1798 \begin_layout Standard
1799 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline opens in many cases a context
1800 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
1801 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
1802 dialog and to modify the citation.
1805 \begin_layout Standard
1810 field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear in the outline.
1811 For example, if you are displaying the list of
1813 Labels and References
1815 and wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
1817 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1821 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1824 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
1827 \begin_layout Standard
1828 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1829 you further to control the display.
1834 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1835 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1841 option keeps it in the current view state.
1842 Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections
1843 \begin_inset space ~
1846 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
1847 \begin_inset space ~
1850 3, the subsections of sections
1851 \begin_inset space ~
1854 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
1859 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1860 \begin_inset space ~
1864 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1866 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1870 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1874 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1877 \begin_layout Standard
1884 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
1885 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
1899 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
1900 So, for example, you can move section
1901 \begin_inset space ~
1905 \begin_inset space ~
1908 2.4 or after section
1909 \begin_inset space ~
1914 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
1927 (or the corresponding key bindings
1935 ) you can change the level of sections.
1936 So you can for example make section
1937 \begin_inset space ~
1941 \begin_inset space ~
1945 \begin_inset space ~
1951 \begin_layout Standard
1952 By right-clicking on a section in the outliner you can select the whole
1953 section to copy, cut or delete it.
1956 \begin_layout Subsection
1957 Horizontal Scrolling
1958 \begin_inset Index idx
1961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1962 Navigating ! Horizontal Scrolling
1970 \begin_layout Standard
1972 does not have a horizontal scrollbar because the standard output page formats
1974 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1978 \begin_inset space \space{}
1982 \begin_inset space ~
1985 A4 are less wide than PC or laptop screens.
1986 Therefore you will get troubles in the output of your document if document
1987 parts exceed the width of the \SpecialChar LyX
1991 \begin_layout Standard
1992 There are of course exceptions where horizontal scrolling is necessary.
1996 \begin_layout Itemize
1998 is used on a small tablet computer
2001 \begin_layout Itemize
2002 Wide tables that are rotated 90° to fit a whole page
2006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2014 \begin_inset space ~
2027 \begin_layout Itemize
2028 Math constructs with long command names
2031 \begin_layout Standard
2032 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
2033 has an mechanism that scrolls automatically when the cursor
2035 As example shrink the \SpecialChar LyX
2036 windows so that table
2037 \begin_inset space ~
2041 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2043 reference "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2048 You will now see a dotted red line at the right or the left side of the
2050 Put the cursor into the table and move it with the Tab or the arrow keys
2051 to see the horizontal scrolling of the table.
2054 \begin_layout Standard
2055 \begin_inset Float table
2061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2062 \begin_inset Caption Standard
2064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2065 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2067 name "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2071 Horizontal scrolling test.
2079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2081 \begin_inset Tabular
2082 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="3">
2083 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
2084 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2085 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2086 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2088 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2097 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2106 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
2109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2128 \begin_layout Section
2129 Input/Word Completion
2130 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2132 name "sec:Input-Completion"
2137 \begin_inset Index idx
2140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2147 \begin_inset Index idx
2150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2181 \begin_layout Standard
2183 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2185 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2186 is used to propose completions.
2189 \begin_layout Standard
2190 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
2193 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
2198 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2205 \begin_inset space ~
2209 \begin_inset space ~
2214 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2218 \begin_inset space ~
2223 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2224 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2228 \begin_inset space ~
2234 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2235 popup completion, you can set the minimal number of characters a word must
2236 have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose
2237 if long completions should be abbreviated.
2240 \begin_layout Standard
2242 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are
2243 completions available.
2248 key to accept a proposed completion.
2249 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2250 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
2251 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2258 \begin_layout Standard
2259 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2260 ing options for text.
2261 The special math option
2265 enables characters to be composed.
2266 If, for example, you want to insert the character
2267 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2270 , you can then input the characters
2271 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2279 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2282 to a formula to get it.
2283 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use
2284 of the math toolbar.
2285 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
2289 that is in \SpecialChar LyX
2290 's installation folder.
2291 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2300 \begin_layout Section
2302 \begin_inset Index idx
2305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2312 \begin_inset Index idx
2315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2344 \begin_inset Index idx
2347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2378 \begin_layout Standard
2379 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2393 , which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
2396 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2400 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in section
2401 \begin_inset space ~
2405 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2407 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
2414 \begin_layout Standard
2418 \begin_inset space ~
2426 \begin_inset space ~
2447 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2451 \begin_layout Labeling
2452 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2456 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2457 LatexCommand nomenclature
2459 description "Tabulator key"
2466 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
2468 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2469 \begin_inset space ~
2473 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2475 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2480 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2482 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2486 , especially section
2487 \begin_inset space ~
2491 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2493 reference "subsec:Lists"
2499 If you are still confused, look in the
2504 \begin_inset Newline newline
2512 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2513 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2517 \begin_layout Labeling
2518 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2522 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2523 LatexCommand nomenclature
2525 description "Escape key"
2533 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2537 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2540 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2541 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2544 \begin_layout Labeling
2545 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2551 \begin_inset space ~
2555 \begin_inset space ~
2562 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2563 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2567 \begin_layout Standard
2568 There are three modifier keys:
2571 \begin_layout Labeling
2572 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2578 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2586 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2590 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2591 LatexCommand nomenclature
2593 description "Control key"
2598 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending
2599 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2603 \begin_layout Itemize
2612 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2615 \begin_layout Itemize
2624 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2627 \begin_layout Itemize
2636 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
2640 \begin_layout Labeling
2641 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2647 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2655 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2659 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2660 LatexCommand nomenclature
2662 description "Shift key"
2667 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
2668 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
2671 \begin_layout Labeling
2672 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2678 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2686 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2690 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2691 LatexCommand nomenclature
2693 description "Alt or Meta key"
2698 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
2699 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
2700 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
2706 \begin_inset Newline newline
2709 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
2711 menu accelerator keys
2714 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
2715 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
2719 \begin_layout Standard
2720 For example, the sequence
2721 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2727 \begin_inset space ~
2731 \begin_inset space ~
2737 \begin_inset space ~
2745 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2749 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2753 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2758 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2764 \begin_inset space ~
2770 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2780 \begin_layout Standard
2785 manual lists all other things bound to the
2793 \begin_layout Standard
2794 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use
2796 , because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at
2797 the bottom of \SpecialChar LyX
2798 's main window which describes the name of the action you
2799 have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action.
2800 The \SpecialChar LyX
2801 menus also list the defined key bindings.
2802 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
2803 in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding
2805 However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
2806 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2814 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2821 followed by a capital
2828 \begin_layout Chapter
2831 \begin_inset Index idx
2834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2844 \begin_layout Section
2846 \begin_inset Index idx
2849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2858 \begin_layout Subsection
2862 \begin_layout Standard
2863 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
2864 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
2865 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
2866 numbering schemes, and so on.
2867 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
2868 and format the title of your document differently.
2871 \begin_layout Standard
2876 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
2877 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
2878 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
2879 If you don't choose a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
2880 picks one for you by default.
2881 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
2884 \begin_layout Subsection
2886 \begin_inset Index idx
2889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2896 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2898 name "sec:Document-Classes"
2905 \begin_layout Standard
2906 You can select a class using the
2908 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
2909 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
2913 \begin_inset Index idx
2916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2923 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
2927 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2931 \begin_layout Standard
2932 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
2937 \begin_layout Description
2938 Article for basic articles
2941 \begin_layout Description
2942 Report for basic reports
2945 \begin_layout Description
2946 Book for writing a book
2949 \begin_layout Description
2950 Letter for US-style letters
2953 \begin_layout Standard
2954 There are also some non-standard classes, which \SpecialChar LyX
2955 only uses if you have installed
2956 the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
2957 class files, though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
2958 distributions will include
2960 Here are some of the classes.
2961 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
2963 Special Document Classes
2972 \begin_layout Description
2973 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
2976 \begin_layout Description
2977 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
2981 \begin_layout Description
2982 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
2986 \begin_layout Description
2987 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
2988 Mathematical Society (AMS).
2989 There are three article layouts available.
2990 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
2991 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
2992 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
2993 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
2995 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2998 sequential numbering
2999 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3002 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
3003 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
3004 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
3005 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
3008 \begin_layout Description
3009 Beamer Layout for presentations
3012 \begin_layout Description
3013 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
3014 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3015 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3016 with \SpecialChar LyX
3020 \begin_layout Description
3021 Chess Layout to write about chess games
3024 \begin_layout Description
3026 \begin_inset space ~
3029 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
3032 \begin_layout Description
3033 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
3036 \begin_layout Description
3037 Foils Used to make transparencies
3040 \begin_layout Description
3041 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
3042 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3043 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3044 with \SpecialChar LyX
3048 \begin_layout Description
3049 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
3050 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
3053 \begin_layout Description
3054 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
3057 \begin_layout Description
3058 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
3061 \begin_layout Description
3062 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
3063 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
3064 (Is used by this document.)
3067 \begin_layout Description
3068 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
3071 \begin_layout Description
3072 Powerdot Layout for presentations
3075 \begin_layout Description
3080 is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
3081 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
3083 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
3087 \begin_layout Description
3088 Slides Used to make transparencies
3091 \begin_layout Description
3093 \begin_inset space ~
3096 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
3097 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
3100 \begin_layout Description
3101 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
3104 \begin_layout Standard
3105 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
3107 You can find details about the non-standard classes in chapter
3109 Special Document Classes
3116 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
3117 of the document classes.
3120 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3124 \begin_layout Standard
3125 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
3127 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3128 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3130 \begin_inset Index idx
3133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3142 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3146 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3150 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
3151 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
3153 So it may seem that something is wrong.
3156 \begin_layout Standard
3159 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use, and
3164 , are highly specialized.
3166 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible, and
3167 it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing number.
3168 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
3169 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
3170 by some document class.
3171 There are just too many of them.
3172 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
3175 \begin_layout Standard
3176 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
3177 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3181 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3184 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
3185 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
3186 document class for a new file.
3188 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
3191 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3198 manual for information on how to install them.
3199 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3205 \begin_layout Standard
3206 Although \SpecialChar LyX
3207 provides support for many different sorts of documents, it does
3208 not include support for every document class people might want to use.
3209 For example, many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
3210 class files to be used for dissertation
3211 s submitted to those universities.
3212 The \SpecialChar LyX
3213 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3215 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3219 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3225 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3228 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3230 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3232 name "subsec:Modules"
3237 \begin_inset Index idx
3240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3249 \begin_layout Standard
3250 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3251 chosen document class.
3252 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3253 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3260 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3264 \begin_inset Index idx
3267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3274 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3278 \begin_layout Standard
3279 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
3280 packages or file format converters that are not always
3281 installed by default.
3283 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3284 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3285 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3286 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since \SpecialChar LyX
3288 to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3289 file without the missing prerequisites.
3290 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3291 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
3294 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3298 \begin_inset Index idx
3301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3302 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
3308 See section Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3313 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3316 \begin_layout Standard
3317 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3325 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3327 will advise you about these things.
3335 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3337 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3339 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
3344 \begin_inset Index idx
3347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3348 Document ! Local Layout
3356 \begin_layout Standard
3357 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
3358 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
3359 : They are intended to be used in
3360 a variety of different documents.
3361 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3362 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3363 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3364 need a specific inset or character style only that one time.
3365 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
3367 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
3369 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3373 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3385 manual for information on how to use it.
3388 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3392 \begin_layout Standard
3393 Each class has a default set of options.
3394 Here's a quick table describing them:
3397 \begin_layout Standard
3398 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3404 \begin_layout Standard
3406 \begin_inset Tabular
3407 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3408 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
3409 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3410 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3411 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3412 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3413 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3415 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3424 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3442 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3460 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3478 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3498 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3515 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3533 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3551 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3569 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3589 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3606 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3624 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3642 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3660 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3680 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3697 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3715 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3733 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3751 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3771 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3788 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3806 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3824 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3842 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3867 \begin_layout Standard
3868 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3874 \begin_layout Standard
3875 You're probably also wondering what
3876 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3880 \begin_inset space ~
3884 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3888 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
3889 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
3894 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
3899 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
3909 headings, there are also
3917 headings, and so on.
3918 We will describe these headings fully in section
3919 \begin_inset space ~
3923 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3925 reference "subsec:Headings"
3932 \begin_layout Subsection
3934 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3936 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
3941 \begin_inset Index idx
3944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3951 \begin_inset Index idx
3954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3963 \begin_layout Standard
3964 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
3966 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3973 \begin_inset space ~
3981 \begin_inset space ~
3986 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
3988 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
3989 doesn't support special options you want to
3990 use for your document.
3991 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
3992 -class and its options, you have to read
3996 \begin_layout Standard
4000 \begin_inset space ~
4007 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4013 \begin_inset space ~
4018 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
4019 You can choose between the following five options:
4022 \begin_layout Labeling
4023 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4028 Use default page style of current class.
4031 \begin_layout Labeling
4032 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4037 No page numbers or headings.
4040 \begin_layout Labeling
4041 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4049 \begin_layout Labeling
4050 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4055 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
4056 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
4057 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the
4058 maximum sectioning level of the class.
4061 \begin_layout Labeling
4062 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4067 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
4068 have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4074 \begin_inset Index idx
4077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4085 How they are defined is explained in section
4086 \begin_inset space ~
4090 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4092 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
4099 \begin_layout Standard
4100 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
4101 \begin_inset space ~
4105 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4107 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4114 \begin_layout Subsection
4115 Paper Size and Orientation
4116 \begin_inset Index idx
4119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4120 Document ! Paper size
4126 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4128 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
4135 \begin_layout Standard
4136 You can find the following options in the menu
4139 \begin_inset space ~
4146 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4150 \begin_inset Index idx
4153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4162 \begin_layout Labeling
4163 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4167 \begin_inset space ~
4172 What size paper to print on.
4177 \begin_layout Itemize
4183 \begin_layout Itemize
4189 \begin_layout Itemize
4195 \begin_layout Itemize
4201 \begin_layout Itemize
4204 US letter, US legal, US executive
4207 \begin_layout Itemize
4213 \begin_layout Itemize
4220 \begin_layout Labeling
4221 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4226 To choose whether to output as
4237 \begin_layout Labeling
4238 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4242 \begin_inset space ~
4247 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4248 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4251 \begin_layout Subsection
4253 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4255 name "subsec:Margins"
4260 \begin_inset Index idx
4263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4270 \begin_inset Index idx
4273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4282 \begin_layout Standard
4283 Paper margins are set in the menu
4285 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4289 \begin_inset Index idx
4292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4301 \begin_layout Standard
4302 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4303 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4304 the paper format and the font size into account.
4307 \begin_layout Subsection
4311 \begin_layout Standard
4312 If you change a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4318 That includes the paragraph environments.
4319 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4320 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4321 If this is the case, and you change the document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4323 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4324 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4328 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4332 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4334 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4335 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4336 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4339 \begin_layout Section
4340 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4341 \begin_inset Index idx
4344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4345 Paragraph ! Indentation
4353 \begin_layout Subsection
4355 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4357 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4364 \begin_layout Standard
4365 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4366 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4369 \begin_layout Standard
4370 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4371 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4372 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4373 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4377 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4383 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4384 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4385 language than English.
4387 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
4390 \begin_layout Standard
4391 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4392 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4393 into \SpecialChar LyX
4395 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4398 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4400 That way, \SpecialChar LyX
4401 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures
4402 fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom of
4407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4409 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
4410 goes to produce a printable file.
4415 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4417 gives you the ability globally to change
4421 these pre-coded spacings.
4422 We will explain more later.
4425 \begin_layout Subsection
4426 Paragraph Separation
4427 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4429 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4434 \begin_inset Index idx
4437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4438 Paragraph ! Separation
4446 \begin_layout Standard
4454 \begin_inset space ~
4462 \begin_inset space ~
4469 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4473 \begin_inset Index idx
4476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4482 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4485 \begin_layout Subsection
4489 \begin_layout Standard
4490 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4493 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4495 \begin_inset space ~
4500 dialog and toggle the
4503 \begin_inset space ~
4508 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4511 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4515 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4516 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4520 \begin_layout Standard
4521 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4522 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4525 \begin_layout Subsection
4527 \begin_inset Index idx
4530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4531 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4539 \begin_layout Standard
4542 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4546 \begin_inset Index idx
4549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4558 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4562 \begin_inset space ~
4571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4572 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4578 \begin_inset Index idx
4581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4588 installed to use this feature.
4593 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4595 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4597 \begin_inset space ~
4602 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
4603 is normally defined in the environment's style.
4606 \begin_layout Section
4607 Paragraph Environments
4608 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4610 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4615 \begin_inset Index idx
4618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4619 Paragraph ! Environments
4625 \begin_inset Index idx
4628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4629 Paragraph environments|(
4637 \begin_layout Subsection
4641 \begin_layout Standard
4642 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4645 \begin_layout Standard
4654 } \SpecialChar ldots
4664 \begin_inset Newline newline
4667 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
4669 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
4670 , or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4671 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4680 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4683 \begin_layout Standard
4684 A paragraph environment is simply a
4685 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4689 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4692 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4693 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4694 scheme, labels, and so on.
4695 Additionally, you can
4696 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4700 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4703 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4704 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4705 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4706 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
4708 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
4710 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
4713 \begin_layout Standard
4714 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4715 \begin_inset Graphics
4716 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4722 at the left end of the toolbar.
4724 will change the environment of the
4728 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4729 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4730 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4734 \begin_layout Standard
4743 create a new paragraph using the
4747 paragraph environment.
4749 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4753 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4756 because if you are in one of these environments:
4759 \begin_layout Itemize
4765 \begin_layout Itemize
4771 \begin_layout Itemize
4777 \begin_layout Itemize
4783 \begin_layout Itemize
4789 \begin_layout Itemize
4795 \begin_layout Itemize
4801 \begin_layout Standard
4803 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
4807 , rather than resetting it to
4812 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
4813 \begin_inset space ~
4817 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4819 reference "sec:Nesting"
4826 \begin_layout Subsection
4830 \begin_layout Standard
4831 The default paragraph environment is
4836 It creates a plain paragraph.
4838 resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4839 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4840 this manual) are in the
4847 \begin_layout Standard
4848 You can nest a paragraph using the
4852 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
4860 \begin_layout Subsection
4862 \begin_inset Index idx
4865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4874 \begin_layout Standard
4875 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
4876 title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the author(s)
4878 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4882 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4885 for thanks or contact information.
4886 For certain types of documents, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4887 places all of this on a separate page
4888 along with today's date.
4889 For other types of documents, the title
4890 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4894 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4897 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
4901 \begin_layout Standard
4903 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
4917 Here's how you use them:
4920 \begin_layout Itemize
4921 Put the title of your document in the
4928 \begin_layout Itemize
4929 Put the author name in the
4936 \begin_layout Itemize
4937 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
4938 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
4944 Note that using this environment is optional.
4945 If you don't provide any, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4946 will automatically insert today's date.
4947 If you don't want a date, use the option
4949 Suppress default date on front page
4953 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4954 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
4956 \begin_inset space ~
4964 \begin_layout Standard
4965 You can use footnotes to insert
4966 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4970 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4973 or contact information.
4976 \begin_layout Subsection
4978 \begin_inset Index idx
4981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4988 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4990 name "subsec:Headings"
4997 \begin_layout Standard
4998 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
5000 takes care of the numbering for you.
5003 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5005 \begin_inset Index idx
5008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5009 Section headings ! Numbered
5017 \begin_layout Standard
5018 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
5022 \begin_layout Enumerate
5028 \begin_layout Enumerate
5034 \begin_layout Enumerate
5040 \begin_layout Enumerate
5046 \begin_layout Enumerate
5052 \begin_layout Enumerate
5058 \begin_layout Enumerate
5064 \begin_layout Standard
5066 labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
5067 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
5068 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
5071 \begin_layout Standard
5072 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
5073 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
5074 You group the book into chapters.
5076 does a similar grouping:
5079 \begin_layout Itemize
5084 is divided into either
5095 \begin_layout Itemize
5107 \begin_layout Itemize
5119 \begin_layout Itemize
5131 \begin_layout Itemize
5143 \begin_layout Itemize
5155 \begin_layout Standard
5156 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
5159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5164 Not all document types use the
5168 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
5173 is the top-level heading.
5181 \begin_layout Standard
5186 environment to label a new sub-subsection, \SpecialChar LyX
5187 labels it with its number,
5188 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
5190 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
5192 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5196 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5202 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5204 \begin_inset Index idx
5207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5208 Section headings ! Unnumbered
5216 \begin_layout Standard
5217 The unnumbered section headings have a
5218 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5222 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5225 at the end of their name.
5226 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
5227 the table of contents, see section
5228 \begin_inset space ~
5232 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5241 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5242 Changing the Numbering
5243 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5245 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
5252 \begin_layout Standard
5253 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5254 in the Table of Contents.
5255 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5257 Just as certain classes start with
5271 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5281 This is something you can change.
5284 \begin_layout Standard
5287 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5291 \begin_inset Index idx
5294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5303 \begin_inset space ~
5307 \begin_inset space ~
5312 you will see two counters.
5317 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
5318 numbers a section heading.
5319 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5323 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5324 Short Titles of Headings
5325 \begin_inset Index idx
5328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5329 Section headings ! Short titles
5335 \begin_inset Argument 1
5338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5345 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5347 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5354 \begin_layout Standard
5355 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5356 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5357 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5358 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5361 \begin_layout Standard
5363 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5364 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5365 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5366 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5369 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
5371 \begin_inset space ~
5377 This will insert a box labeled
5378 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5382 \begin_inset space ~
5386 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5389 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5390 This also works for captions inside floats.
5391 There can only be one short title per title.
5394 \begin_layout Standard
5395 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5398 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5402 \begin_layout Standard
5403 The following information applies to all section headings:
5406 \begin_layout Itemize
5407 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5410 \begin_layout Itemize
5411 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5414 \begin_layout Itemize
5415 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5418 \begin_layout Itemize
5419 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5422 \begin_layout Subsection
5426 \begin_layout Standard
5428 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5442 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5443 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5444 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5445 the text they contain.
5446 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5454 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5457 \begin_layout Standard
5458 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5467 when you start a new paragraph.
5468 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5472 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5473 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5474 have to change back to the
5478 environment yourself.
5481 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5483 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5490 \begin_inset Index idx
5493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5502 \begin_layout Standard
5503 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5504 time for the differences.
5513 are identical except for one difference:
5517 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5526 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5529 \begin_layout Standard
5530 Here's an example of the
5543 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5545 See – no indentation!
5549 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5550 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5551 the other paragraph.
5554 \begin_layout Standard
5555 Here's another example, this time in the
5562 \begin_layout Quotation
5568 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5569 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5570 the first line, then
5574 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5578 you were quoting other text.
5581 \begin_layout Quotation
5582 Here's a new paragraph.
5583 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5584 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5587 \begin_layout Standard
5588 As the examples show,
5592 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5593 They should put quotes in the
5598 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5602 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5605 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5607 \begin_inset Index idx
5610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5617 \begin_inset Index idx
5620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5627 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5636 \begin_layout Standard
5641 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5647 \begin_inset Newline newline
5650 Which I did not rehearse!
5654 It could be much worse.
5655 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5657 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5658 indented a bit more than the first.
5659 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5665 \begin_inset Newline newline
5668 And make things look fine
5669 \begin_inset Newline newline
5675 arg "newline-insert newline"
5681 \begin_layout Standard
5686 does not indent both margins.
5687 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5688 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
5691 arg "newline-insert newline"
5697 \begin_layout Subsection
5699 \begin_inset Index idx
5702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5709 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5718 \begin_layout Standard
5720 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5730 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5731 labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5740 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5741 lets you provide your own label.
5742 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
5743 describing some general features of all four of them.
5746 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5750 \begin_layout Standard
5751 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5753 First, \SpecialChar LyX
5754 treats each paragraph as a list item.
5763 reset the environment to
5767 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5768 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
5769 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5773 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
5777 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
5784 \begin_layout Standard
5785 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5786 In fact, \SpecialChar LyX
5787 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is
5789 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5790 you read all of section
5791 \begin_inset space ~
5795 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5797 reference "sec:Nesting"
5804 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5806 \begin_inset Index idx
5809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5816 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5825 \begin_layout Standard
5826 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
5830 paragraph environment.
5831 It has the following properties:
5834 \begin_layout Itemize
5835 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
5839 \begin_layout Itemize
5841 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
5844 \begin_layout Itemize
5845 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
5849 \begin_layout Itemize
5850 The items can have any length.
5852 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
5853 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
5860 \begin_layout Itemize
5865 environment inside another
5869 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
5873 \begin_layout Itemize
5874 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
5877 \begin_layout Itemize
5879 always shows the same symbol on screen.
5882 \begin_layout Itemize
5884 \begin_inset space ~
5888 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5890 reference "sec:Nesting"
5894 for a full explanation of nesting.
5898 \begin_layout Standard
5899 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
5908 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
5911 \begin_layout Standard
5912 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
5913 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
5916 \begin_layout Itemize
5917 The label for the first level
5921 is a large black dot, or bullet.
5925 \begin_layout Itemize
5926 The label for the second level is a dash.
5930 \begin_layout Itemize
5931 The label for the third is an asterisk.
5935 \begin_layout Itemize
5936 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
5940 \begin_layout Itemize
5941 Back out to the third level.
5945 \begin_layout Itemize
5946 Back to the second level.
5950 \begin_layout Itemize
5951 Back to the outermost level.
5954 \begin_layout Standard
5955 These are the default labels for an
5960 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
5962 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5965 dialog in the submenu
5970 \begin_inset Index idx
5973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5979 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
5983 \begin_layout Standard
5984 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
5985 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
5987 \begin_inset space ~
5991 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5993 reference "sec:Nesting"
6000 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6002 \begin_inset Index idx
6005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6012 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6014 name "sec:Enumerate"
6021 \begin_layout Standard
6026 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
6027 It has these properties:
6030 \begin_layout Enumerate
6031 Each item has a numeral as its label.
6035 \begin_layout Enumerate
6036 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
6040 \begin_layout Enumerate
6042 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
6045 \begin_layout Enumerate
6050 environment resets the counter to one.
6053 \begin_layout Enumerate
6066 \begin_layout Enumerate
6067 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
6068 Items can have any length.
6071 \begin_layout Enumerate
6072 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
6075 \begin_layout Enumerate
6076 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
6079 \begin_layout Enumerate
6080 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
6084 \begin_layout Standard
6093 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
6095 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
6096 labels the four different levels in an
6103 \begin_layout Enumerate
6104 The first level of an
6108 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
6112 \begin_layout Enumerate
6113 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
6117 \begin_layout Enumerate
6118 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
6122 \begin_layout Enumerate
6123 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
6126 \begin_layout Enumerate
6127 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
6132 \begin_layout Enumerate
6133 Back to the third level
6137 \begin_layout Enumerate
6138 Back to the second level.
6142 \begin_layout Enumerate
6143 Back to the outermost level.
6146 \begin_layout Standard
6147 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
6151 environment, see section
6152 \begin_inset space ~
6156 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6158 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6163 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in \SpecialChar LyX
6167 \begin_layout Standard
6168 There is more to nesting
6172 environments than we've stated here.
6173 You should read section
6174 \begin_inset space ~
6178 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6180 reference "sec:Nesting"
6184 to learn more about nesting.
6187 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6189 \begin_inset Index idx
6192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6201 \begin_layout Standard
6202 Unlike the previous two environments, the
6206 list has no fixed label.
6207 Instead, \SpecialChar LyX
6209 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6213 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6216 of the first line as the label.
6220 \begin_layout Description
6221 Example: This is an example of the
6228 \begin_layout Standard
6230 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
6234 \begin_layout Standard
6236 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6240 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6243 it is meant that the first usage of the
6247 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
6249 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6257 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6262 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6263 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
6265 \begin_inset space ~
6271 \begin_inset space ~
6275 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6277 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
6281 for more information.) Here is an example:
6284 \begin_layout Description
6286 \begin_inset space ~
6289 Example: This one shows how to use a
6292 \begin_inset space ~
6304 \begin_layout Description
6305 Usage: You should use the
6309 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6310 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6312 It's not a good idea to use a
6316 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6317 You're better off using
6329 paragraphs into them.
6332 \begin_layout Description
6333 Nesting: You can nest
6337 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6341 \begin_layout Standard
6342 Notice that after the first line, \SpecialChar LyX
6343 indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6344 them from the first line.
6347 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6349 \begin_inset Index idx
6352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6361 \begin_layout Standard
6366 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
6367 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
6371 \begin_layout Standard
6380 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
6382 Here are its properties:
6385 \begin_layout Labeling
6386 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6388 \begin_inset space ~
6391 labels \SpecialChar LyX
6393 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6397 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6400 of each line as the item label.
6405 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6406 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6407 space as described above.
6410 \begin_layout Labeling
6411 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6412 margins As you can see, \SpecialChar LyX
6413 uses different margins for the item label and the
6414 body of the item text.
6415 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6416 label width plus a little extra space.
6420 \begin_layout Labeling
6421 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6423 \begin_inset space ~
6426 width \SpecialChar LyX
6427 uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is larger.
6428 If the label width is larger, the label
6429 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6433 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6436 into the first line.
6437 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6438 margin of the rest of the item text.
6441 \begin_layout Labeling
6442 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6444 \begin_inset space ~
6447 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6452 environment has the same left margin.
6453 \begin_inset Newline newline
6456 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6459 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
6461 \begin_inset space ~
6466 dialog (toolbar button
6469 arg "layout-paragraph"
6476 \begin_inset space ~
6481 determines the default label width.
6482 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6484 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6488 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6491 multiple times instead.
6492 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
6495 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6499 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6502 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6505 \begin_inset space ~
6510 every time you alter a label in a
6515 \begin_inset Newline newline
6518 The predefined default width is the length of
6519 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6523 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6527 \begin_inset space ~
6533 \begin_layout Standard
6538 list the same way as the
6542 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6548 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6552 \begin_layout Standard
6557 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6558 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6560 \begin_inset space ~
6564 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6566 reference "sec:Nesting"
6570 to learn about nesting.
6573 \begin_layout Standard
6574 There is yet another feature of the
6578 list: As you can see in the examples, \SpecialChar LyX
6579 left-justifies the item labels by
6581 You can use additional
6585 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
6586 justifies the item label.
6591 are documented in section
6592 \begin_inset space ~
6596 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6598 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
6603 Here are some examples:
6606 \begin_layout Labeling
6607 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6608 Left The default for
6615 \begin_layout Labeling
6616 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6617 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6624 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6627 \begin_layout Labeling
6628 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6629 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6633 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6640 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6643 \begin_layout Subsection
6645 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6647 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6652 \begin_inset Index idx
6655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6664 \begin_layout Standard
6665 The features described in this section require that the module
6667 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6669 is loaded in the document settings.
6670 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
6676 \begin_inset Index idx
6679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6689 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6690 Custom Enumerate Lists
6691 \begin_inset Index idx
6694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6695 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
6703 \begin_layout Standard
6705 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6708 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6711 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6712 There you add the command
6715 \begin_layout Standard
6723 \begin_layout Standard
6735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6736 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
6737 Code, look at section
6738 \begin_inset space ~
6742 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6744 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6757 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
6764 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
6765 For capital Roman numerals replace
6777 in the command above.
6778 For Arabic numerals use
6786 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6790 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6793 items with capital or small Latin letters use
6808 \begin_layout Standard
6810 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6818 You can only number 26
6819 \begin_inset space ~
6822 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
6830 \begin_layout Standard
6831 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
6832 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
6835 \begin_layout Standard
6836 Here is a list with custom numbering:
6839 \begin_layout Enumerate
6840 \begin_inset Argument 1
6843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6869 \begin_layout Enumerate
6870 \begin_inset Argument 1
6873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6896 \begin_layout Enumerate
6901 \begin_layout Enumerate
6902 \begin_inset Argument 1
6905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6929 \begin_layout Enumerate
6930 \begin_inset Argument 1
6933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6959 \begin_layout Standard
6960 For this list these commands were used:
6963 \begin_layout Standard
6974 \begin_inset Newline newline
6982 \begin_inset Newline newline
6990 \begin_inset Newline newline
7000 \begin_layout Standard
7007 makes the label emphasized and
7016 \begin_layout Standard
7017 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7025 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
7026 lists until you change the definition.
7034 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7036 \begin_inset Index idx
7039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7040 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
7048 \begin_layout Standard
7049 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
7052 \begin_layout Enumerate
7053 \begin_inset Argument 1
7056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7075 \begin_inset Note Note
7078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7079 goes back to default numbering
7087 \begin_layout Enumerate
7091 \begin_layout Standard
7095 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
7099 \begin_layout Standard
7100 To resume an enumeration, use the style
7105 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
7106 to indicate that it is a resumed
7107 list and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
7108 , but in the output.
7111 \begin_layout Standard
7112 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7120 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
7129 \begin_layout Standard
7130 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
7132 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
7133 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
7134 of a normal enumeration.
7135 There, insert the command
7138 \begin_layout Standard
7144 \begin_layout Standard
7149 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
7153 \begin_layout Enumerate
7157 \begin_layout Enumerate
7161 \begin_layout Standard
7162 Enumeration starting at a given value:
7165 \begin_layout Enumerate
7166 \begin_inset Argument 1
7169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7185 This enumeration starts at 4
7188 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7190 \begin_inset Index idx
7193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7202 \begin_layout Standard
7203 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
7205 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
7208 \begin_layout Itemize
7212 \begin_layout Itemize
7213 with standard spacing
7216 \begin_layout Standard
7217 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
7219 Add there the command
7223 to get no additional list space like in this example:
7226 \begin_layout Itemize
7227 \begin_inset Argument 1
7230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7249 \begin_layout Itemize
7253 \begin_layout Itemize
7257 \begin_layout Standard
7258 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7265 \begin_inset Index idx
7268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7276 For more information see its documentation,
7277 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7287 \begin_layout Standard
7288 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7290 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7291 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7292 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7295 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7298 \begin_layout Enumerate
7299 \begin_inset Argument 1
7302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7310 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7323 \begin_layout Enumerate
7324 with negative indentation
7327 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7328 Further Customization
7329 \begin_inset Index idx
7332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7333 Lists ! Customization
7341 \begin_layout Standard
7342 You can also change the style of description lists.
7346 \begin_layout Standard
7352 \begin_layout Standard
7353 changes the description label font, the command
7356 \begin_layout Standard
7362 \begin_layout Standard
7363 sets the list style.
7366 \begin_layout Standard
7367 An example where the command
7370 \begin_layout Standard
7375 itshape, style=nextline
7378 \begin_layout Standard
7382 \begin_layout Description
7384 \begin_inset space ~
7388 \begin_inset Argument 1
7391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7397 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7399 itshape, style=nextline
7409 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7410 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7414 \begin_layout Description
7416 \begin_inset space ~
7419 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7420 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7421 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7424 \begin_layout Standard
7425 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7431 \begin_inset Index idx
7434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7442 For more information see its documentation
7443 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7453 \begin_layout Subsection
7455 \begin_inset Index idx
7458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7467 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7469 \begin_inset space ~
7472 Address: An Overview
7475 \begin_layout Standard
7476 Although \SpecialChar LyX
7477 has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7485 \begin_inset space ~
7491 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7492 in a specific order, otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
7493 gags on the document.
7494 In contrast, you can use the
7501 \begin_inset space ~
7506 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7507 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7511 \begin_layout Standard
7512 Of course, you're not limited to using
7519 \begin_inset space ~
7528 \begin_inset space ~
7533 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7534 some European academic papers.
7537 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7539 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7541 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7548 \begin_layout Standard
7553 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7554 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7558 \begin_inset space ~
7563 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7564 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7565 Here's an example of each:
7568 \begin_layout Right Address
7570 \begin_inset Newline newline
7574 \begin_inset Newline newline
7578 \begin_inset Newline newline
7581 When is it? What is today?
7584 \begin_layout Standard
7588 \begin_inset space ~
7594 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which \SpecialChar LyX
7596 the largest block of text on a single line.
7597 Here's an example of the
7604 \begin_layout Address
7606 \begin_inset Newline newline
7609 Where do I send this
7610 \begin_inset Newline newline
7613 Your post office and country
7616 \begin_layout Standard
7617 As you can see, both
7624 \begin_inset space ~
7629 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7634 in either of these environments, \SpecialChar LyX
7635 resets the nesting depth and sets the
7641 This makes sense, since
7649 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7650 Thus, you have to use
7657 arg "newline-insert newline"
7662 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7663 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
7665 \begin_inset space ~
7669 \begin_inset space ~
7674 ) to start a new line in an
7681 \begin_inset space ~
7689 \begin_layout Subsection
7693 \begin_layout Standard
7694 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7695 or list of references.
7697 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7700 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7702 \begin_inset Index idx
7705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7714 \begin_layout Standard
7719 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7720 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7721 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7722 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7736 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7737 The book document classes ignores the
7741 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7745 in a letter document class.
7748 \begin_layout Standard
7753 environment does several things for you.
7754 First, it puts the centered label
7755 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7759 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7763 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7765 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7766 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7767 the subsequent text.
7768 Well, that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
7770 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
7774 \begin_layout Standard
7775 Starting a new paragraph by entering
7779 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7780 The new paragraph will still be in the
7785 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
7786 finish entering the abstract of your document.
7789 \begin_layout Standard
7790 \begin_inset Float figure
7795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7797 \begin_inset Graphics
7798 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
7805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7806 \begin_inset Caption Standard
7808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7809 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7811 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7832 \begin_layout Standard
7833 We would love to demonstrate the
7837 environment, but since this document is in the
7838 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7842 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7845 class, we can't do this.
7846 We inserted it therefore as figure
7847 \begin_inset space ~
7851 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7853 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7858 If you have never heard of an
7859 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7863 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7866 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
7869 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7871 \begin_inset Index idx
7874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7881 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7883 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
7890 \begin_layout Standard
7895 environment is used to list references.
7896 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7897 only use it at the end of the document.
7909 \begin_layout Standard
7910 When you first open a
7914 environment, \SpecialChar LyX
7915 adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
7916 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7920 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7924 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7928 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7931 depending on the document class.
7932 The heading is in a large boldface font.
7933 Each paragraph of the
7937 environment is a bibliography entry.
7942 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7943 Each new paragraph is still in the
7950 \begin_layout Standard
7951 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
7952 by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
7954 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
7956 handling, have a look at section
7957 \begin_inset space ~
7961 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7963 reference "sec:Bibliography"
7970 \begin_layout Subsection
7971 Special Environments
7974 \begin_layout Standard
7976 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a
7977 computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
7980 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7985 \begin_inset Index idx
7988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7996 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7998 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
8005 \begin_layout Standard
8011 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
8013 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
8018 key as a fixed whitespace.
8022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8035 \begin_inset space ~
8040 instead of an end-of-word marker.
8058 * are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
8061 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
8064 arg "newline-insert newline"
8081 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8082 So, when you finish using the
8087 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
8088 Also, you can nest the
8093 environment inside of others.
8096 \begin_layout Standard
8097 There are a few quirks with this environment:
8100 \begin_layout Itemize
8104 arg "newline-insert newline"
8107 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
8108 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
8112 \begin_inset space \space{}
8122 arg "newline-insert newline"
8128 \begin_layout Itemize
8132 arg "newline-insert newline"
8142 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
8148 \begin_layout Itemize
8149 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
8150 You must put at least one
8154 in any line you want blank.
8155 Otherwise, \SpecialChar LaTeX
8159 \begin_layout Itemize
8160 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
8164 since that will insert
8169 You get the typewriter double quotes with
8172 arg "self-insert \""
8178 \begin_layout Standard
8182 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8186 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8190 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8194 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8198 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8199 printf("Hello World!
8204 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8208 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8212 \begin_layout Standard
8213 This is just the standard
8214 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8218 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8225 \begin_layout Standard
8231 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
8233 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
8234 as if you used a typewriter.
8235 \begin_inset Index idx
8238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8239 Paragraph environments|)
8244 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
8247 Program Code Listings
8252 \begin_inset space ~
8260 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8264 \begin_inset Index idx
8267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8276 \begin_layout Standard
8281 environment is similar to the
8286 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
8287 computer console text.
8292 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8306 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and
8307 you can have empty lines.
8320 \begin_layout Itemize
8321 have a certain language and a text style
8324 \begin_layout Itemize
8325 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
8326 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
8327 and \SpecialChar TeX
8331 \begin_layout Standard
8332 Because of these properties
8336 works like a typewriter.
8340 \begin_layout Verbatim
8344 \begin_layout Verbatim
8347 The following 2 lines are empty:
8350 \begin_layout Verbatim
8354 \begin_layout Verbatim
8358 \begin_layout Verbatim
8359 Almost everything is allowed in Verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
8364 \begin_layout Standard
8369 environment is identical to
8373 with the difference that spaces appear in the output as the character '
8374 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
8381 \begin_layout Verbatim*
8385 \begin_layout Section
8386 Nesting Environments
8387 \begin_inset Index idx
8390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8391 Nesting ! Environments
8397 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8406 \begin_layout Subsection
8410 \begin_layout Standard
8412 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific propertie
8414 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8416 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8418 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8420 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8424 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8430 \begin_layout Enumerate
8434 \begin_layout Enumerate
8439 \begin_layout Enumerate
8443 \begin_layout Enumerate
8448 \begin_layout Enumerate
8452 \begin_layout Standard
8453 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8454 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8456 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
8458 \begin_inset space ~
8462 \begin_inset space ~
8470 \begin_inset space ~
8474 \begin_inset space ~
8479 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
8481 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8484 arg "depth-increment"
8490 arg "depth-decrement"
8504 arg "depth-increment"
8510 arg "depth-decrement"
8514 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
8515 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8519 \begin_layout Standard
8520 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
8521 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8522 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8523 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8524 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8527 \begin_layout Standard
8528 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8530 , you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're about
8532 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8535 \begin_layout Subsection
8536 What You Can and Can't Nest
8539 \begin_layout Standard
8540 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8541 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8544 \begin_layout Standard
8545 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
8546 than a simple yes or no.
8547 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8550 \begin_layout Itemize
8551 Completely unnestable
8554 \begin_layout Itemize
8555 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8559 \begin_layout Itemize
8560 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8564 \begin_layout Standard
8565 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8566 environments have them:
8569 \begin_layout Description
8570 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8571 Can't nest into them.
8575 \begin_layout Itemize
8581 \begin_layout Itemize
8587 \begin_layout Itemize
8593 \begin_layout Itemize
8599 \begin_layout Itemize
8606 \begin_layout Description
8608 \begin_inset space ~
8611 Nestable You can nest them.
8612 You can nest other things into them.
8616 \begin_layout Itemize
8622 \begin_layout Itemize
8628 \begin_layout Itemize
8634 \begin_layout Itemize
8640 \begin_layout Itemize
8646 \begin_layout Itemize
8652 \begin_layout Itemize
8658 \begin_layout Itemize
8665 \begin_layout Itemize
8671 \begin_layout Itemize
8678 \begin_layout Description
8679 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
8680 You can't nest anything into them.
8684 \begin_layout Itemize
8690 \begin_layout Itemize
8696 \begin_layout Itemize
8702 \begin_layout Itemize
8708 \begin_layout Itemize
8714 \begin_layout Itemize
8720 \begin_layout Itemize
8726 \begin_layout Itemize
8732 \begin_layout Itemize
8738 \begin_layout Itemize
8744 \begin_layout Itemize
8750 \begin_layout Itemize
8756 \begin_layout Itemize
8762 \begin_layout Itemize
8766 \begin_inset space ~
8772 \begin_layout Itemize
8779 \begin_layout Standard
8780 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8788 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
8798 \begin_inset space ~
8801 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
8802 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
8803 nested section headings violate this.
8811 \begin_layout Subsection
8812 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
8813 \begin_inset Index idx
8816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8817 Nesting ! Tables etc.
8825 \begin_layout Standard
8826 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
8827 affected by nesting anyhow.
8831 \begin_layout Itemize
8835 \begin_layout Itemize
8839 \begin_layout Itemize
8843 \begin_layout Standard
8845 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8853 Figures and tables in
8857 are not affected by this.
8862 Have a look at section
8863 \begin_inset space ~
8867 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8869 reference "sec:Floats"
8873 for more information about
8880 \begin_layout Standard
8882 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
8883 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
8887 \begin_layout Standard
8888 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
8889 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8893 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8896 of its own, it behaves just like a
8897 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8901 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8904 paragraph environment.
8905 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
8909 \begin_layout Standard
8910 Here's an example with a table:
8913 \begin_layout Enumerate
8918 \begin_layout Enumerate
8919 This is (a) and it's nested.
8923 \begin_layout Standard
8924 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8930 \begin_layout Standard
8932 \begin_inset Tabular
8933 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8934 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
8935 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8936 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8938 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8956 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8976 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8994 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9020 \begin_layout Standard
9021 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9028 \begin_layout Enumerate
9030 The table is actually nested inside (a).
9034 \begin_layout Enumerate
9038 \begin_layout Standard
9039 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
9042 \begin_layout Enumerate
9047 \begin_layout Enumerate
9048 This is (a) and it's nested.
9052 \begin_layout Standard
9053 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9059 \begin_layout Standard
9061 \begin_inset Tabular
9062 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9063 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9064 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9065 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9067 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9085 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9105 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9123 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9149 \begin_layout Standard
9150 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9156 \begin_layout Enumerate
9163 In fact, it's not nested at all.
9166 \begin_layout Enumerate
9170 \begin_layout Standard
9171 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
9175 \begin_layout Standard
9176 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
9179 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
9182 \begin_layout Enumerate
9187 \begin_layout Enumerate
9188 This is (a) and it's nested.
9191 \begin_layout Standard
9192 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9198 \begin_layout Standard
9200 \begin_inset Tabular
9201 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9202 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9203 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9204 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9206 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9224 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9244 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9262 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9289 \begin_layout Standard
9290 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9296 \begin_layout Enumerate
9298 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
9305 \begin_layout Enumerate
9309 \begin_layout Standard
9310 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
9316 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
9317 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
9321 \begin_layout Subsection
9322 Usage and General Features
9325 \begin_layout Standard
9326 Speaking of levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9327 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
9329 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9333 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9336 is the innermost possible depth.
9337 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9340 \begin_layout Enumerate
9341 level #1 – outermost
9345 \begin_layout Enumerate
9350 \begin_layout Enumerate
9355 \begin_layout Enumerate
9360 \begin_layout Itemize
9365 \begin_layout Itemize
9374 \begin_layout Standard
9375 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
9376 both of them in the example.
9377 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
9387 For example, if we tried to nest another
9392 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9396 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9399 , we would get errors.
9402 \begin_layout Subsection
9404 \begin_inset Index idx
9407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9416 \begin_layout Standard
9417 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9418 We have several examples of nested environments.
9419 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9423 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9424 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
9427 \begin_layout Labeling
9428 \labelwidthstring MMM
9429 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9438 \begin_layout Labeling
9439 \labelwidthstring MMM
9440 #2-a This is level #2.
9441 We created it by using
9444 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9450 arg "depth-increment"
9457 \begin_layout Labeling
9458 \labelwidthstring MMM
9459 #3-a This is level #3.
9460 This time, we just enter
9467 arg "depth-increment"
9471 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9475 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9481 arg "depth-increment"
9488 \begin_layout Standard
9493 environment, nested inside of
9494 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9498 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9502 So, it's at level #4.
9503 We did this by entering
9506 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9512 arg "depth-increment"
9515 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9520 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9536 \begin_layout Standard
9541 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9544 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9550 \begin_layout Labeling
9551 \labelwidthstring MMM
9552 #4-a This is level #4.
9556 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9559 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9564 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9568 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9573 keep nesting things inside
9574 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9578 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9585 \begin_layout Labeling
9586 \labelwidthstring MMM
9587 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
9592 \begin_layout Labeling
9593 \labelwidthstring MMM
9594 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
9595 and this is level #6.
9596 By now, you should know how we made these two.
9600 \begin_layout Labeling
9601 \labelwidthstring MMM
9602 #5-b Back to level #5.
9606 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9612 arg "depth-decrement"
9619 \begin_layout Labeling
9620 \labelwidthstring MMM
9624 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9630 arg "depth-decrement"
9633 , we're back at level #4.
9637 \begin_layout Labeling
9638 \labelwidthstring MMM
9639 #3-b Back to level #3.
9640 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9644 \begin_layout Labeling
9645 \labelwidthstring MMM
9646 #2-b Back to level #2.
9651 \begin_layout Labeling
9652 \labelwidthstring MMM
9653 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9654 After this sentence, we will enter
9658 and change the paragraph environment back to
9665 \begin_layout Standard
9666 We could have also used the
9682 environment in place of the
9687 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9690 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9691 Example 2: Inheritance
9694 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9695 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9698 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9707 arg "depth-increment"
9711 \begin_inset Newline newline
9714 which, we will change to the
9722 \begin_layout Enumerate
9727 environment, at level #2.
9730 \begin_layout Enumerate
9731 Notice how the nested
9735 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9739 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9743 \begin_layout Standard
9744 We ended this example by entering
9749 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9753 and reset the nesting depth by using
9756 arg "depth-decrement"
9762 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9763 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
9772 \begin_inset Argument 1
9775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9776 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
9784 \begin_layout Enumerate
9785 This is level #1, in an
9789 paragraph environment.
9790 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
9794 \begin_layout Enumerate
9799 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9805 arg "depth-increment"
9809 Now, what happens if we nest an
9813 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
9814 label be? An asterisk?
9818 \begin_layout Itemize
9828 environment, even though it's at level #3.
9829 So, its label is a bullet.
9830 (We got here by using
9833 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9839 arg "depth-increment"
9842 , then changing the environment to
9850 \begin_layout Itemize
9851 Here's level #4, produced using
9854 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9860 arg "depth-increment"
9864 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
9869 \begin_layout Enumerate
9872 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
9877 Notice the type of numbering, it is
9881 , because we are in the
9889 environment (that is, it is an
9904 \begin_layout Enumerate
9909 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
9910 type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
9914 \begin_layout Enumerate
9915 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
9918 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9921 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
9924 \begin_layout Enumerate
9928 arg "depth-decrement"
9931 to decrease the depth after the next
9934 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9941 \begin_layout Enumerate
9943 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
9948 \begin_layout Enumerate
9950 Even though we've changed levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9951 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral
9955 \begin_layout Enumerate
9956 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
9965 Notice, however, that \SpecialChar LyX
9970 reset the counter for the label.
9974 \begin_layout Enumerate
9978 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9984 arg "depth-decrement"
9987 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
9988 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
9989 into the twofold-nested
9997 \begin_layout Enumerate
9998 The same thing happens if we do another
10001 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10007 arg "depth-decrement"
10010 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
10013 \begin_layout Standard
10014 Lastly, we reset the environment to
10019 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
10030 The number of other
10034 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
10041 The same rule applies for the
10045 environment, as well.
10048 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10049 Example 4: Going Bonkers
10052 \begin_layout Enumerate
10053 We're going to go totally nuts now.
10054 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
10055 the same detail with how we did it.
10064 \begin_layout Standard
10072 arg "depth-increment"
10079 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
10080 the example in parentheses someplace.
10081 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
10082 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
10083 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
10087 \begin_layout Enumerate
10092 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
10096 \begin_layout Verse
10097 Now we will add verse.
10098 \begin_inset Newline newline
10101 It will get much worse.
10102 \begin_inset Newline newline
10112 arg "depth-increment"
10122 \begin_layout Verse
10123 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
10124 \begin_inset Newline newline
10127 Bippitey boppitey boo!
10128 \begin_inset Newline newline
10134 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10142 \begin_layout Verse
10143 Here comes a table:
10147 \begin_layout Standard
10148 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10154 \begin_layout Standard
10156 \begin_inset Tabular
10157 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10158 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10159 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10160 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10162 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
10165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10180 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10200 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
10203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10218 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10245 \begin_layout Verse
10249 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10259 arg "depth-increment"
10265 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10271 \begin_inset Newline newline
10279 arg "depth-decrement"
10286 \begin_layout Enumerate
10291 : level #1) This is another item.
10292 Note that selecting a
10296 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
10297 3 times to put the table inside the
10305 \begin_layout Quotation
10306 We're now ending the
10310 list and changing to
10315 We're still at level #1.
10316 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
10317 The next set of paragraphs is a
10318 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10322 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10325 We will nest both the
10332 \begin_inset space ~
10337 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
10341 for the letter body.
10345 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10348 to preserve the depth.
10349 Remember that you need to use
10352 arg "newline-insert newline"
10355 to create multiple lines inside the
10362 \begin_inset space ~
10372 \begin_layout Right Address
10374 \begin_inset Newline newline
10377 Moosegroin, MT 00100
10378 \begin_inset Newline newline
10384 \begin_layout Address
10386 \begin_inset space ~
10392 \begin_layout Quotation
10393 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
10394 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10397 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
10398 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
10399 a backlog in our orders for methane.
10400 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
10401 as soon as possible.
10402 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
10405 \begin_layout Quotation
10406 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
10407 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
10408 with your order, along with payment.
10411 \begin_layout Quotation
10412 We thank you again for your patience.
10415 \begin_layout Address
10417 \begin_inset Newline newline
10424 \begin_layout Quotation
10425 That ends that example!
10428 \begin_layout Standard
10429 As you can see, nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
10430 gives you a lot of power with just
10432 We could have easily nested an
10453 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10456 \begin_layout Subsection
10458 \begin_inset Index idx
10461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10462 Nesting ! Separation
10468 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10470 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
10477 \begin_layout Standard
10478 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
10480 For example you need two different enumerations:
10483 \begin_layout Enumerate
10488 \begin_layout Enumerate
10493 \begin_layout Enumerate
10497 \begin_layout Standard
10498 \begin_inset Separator plain
10504 \begin_layout Itemize
10510 \begin_layout Standard
10511 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10517 \begin_layout Enumerate
10521 \begin_layout Enumerate
10525 \begin_layout Enumerate
10529 \begin_layout Standard
10530 To split an existing list into two lists, set the cursor at the end of a
10531 list item and use the menu
10533 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10534 Separated <Name> Above
10538 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10539 Separated <Name> Below
10542 This inserts a plain separator (red line in \SpecialChar LyX
10543 ) and before or behind it the
10545 Inside nested environments, it is also possible to split the outer environment.
10548 \begin_layout Standard
10549 By right-clicking on a separator one can change it into a paragraph separator
10550 (red arrow in LyX).
10551 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator
10552 only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
10555 \begin_layout Standard
10556 In general, you get an environment separator when you press
10559 arg "paragraph-break"
10566 environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
10569 \begin_layout Section
10570 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
10571 \begin_inset Index idx
10574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10583 \begin_layout Standard
10584 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
10585 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
10587 more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
10588 be broken at the end of a line.
10589 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
10593 \begin_layout Subsection
10595 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10597 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
10602 \begin_inset Index idx
10605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10614 \begin_layout Standard
10615 The protected space: It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
10616 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
10617 ) not to break the line at
10619 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
10622 \begin_layout Quote
10623 Further documentation is given in section
10624 \begin_inset Newline newline
10628 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10630 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10638 \begin_layout Standard
10639 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
10640 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10644 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10648 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10652 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10654 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10659 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10663 A protected space is set with
10665 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10666 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10668 \begin_inset space ~
10676 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
10682 \begin_layout Subsection
10684 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10686 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
10691 \begin_inset Index idx
10694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10695 Spacing ! Horizontal
10703 \begin_layout Standard
10704 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
10706 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10707 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10711 The length units are listed in Appendix
10712 \begin_inset space ~
10716 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10718 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
10725 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10727 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10729 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
10734 \begin_inset Index idx
10737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10738 Spaces ! Inter-word
10746 \begin_layout Standard
10747 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
10748 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
10749 at the ends of sentences.
10750 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
10751 automatically takes care about this.
10752 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
10753 followed by a period; see section
10754 \begin_inset space ~
10758 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10760 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
10765 To insert a normal space, select
10767 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10768 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10770 \begin_inset space ~
10778 arg "space-insert normal"
10784 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10786 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10788 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
10793 \begin_inset Index idx
10796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10805 \begin_layout Standard
10807 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10811 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10814 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
10815 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10819 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10823 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
10824 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
10825 inside abbreviations:
10828 \begin_layout Quote
10830 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10834 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
10837 \begin_layout Standard
10838 or between values and units.
10839 Compare for example this:
10840 \begin_inset Newline newline
10844 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10848 \begin_inset Newline newline
10851 10 kg (normal space
10854 \begin_layout Standard
10855 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
10857 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10858 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10860 \begin_inset space ~
10868 arg "space-insert thin"
10874 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10878 \begin_layout Standard
10879 You can also insert the following space types:
10882 \begin_layout Description
10884 \begin_inset space ~
10888 \begin_inset space ~
10891 space A line with a
10892 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10896 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
10900 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10903 negative thin space between the arrows.
10906 \begin_layout Description
10908 \begin_inset space ~
10912 \begin_inset space ~
10915 space A line with a
10916 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10920 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
10924 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10927 negative medium space between the arrows.
10930 \begin_layout Description
10932 \begin_inset space ~
10936 \begin_inset space ~
10939 space A line with a
10940 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10944 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
10948 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10951 negative thick space between the arrows.
10954 \begin_layout Description
10956 \begin_inset space ~
10960 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10964 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10968 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
10972 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10976 \begin_inset space ~
10980 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10983 em) space between the arrows.
10986 \begin_layout Description
10988 \begin_inset space ~
10992 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10996 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11000 \begin_inset space \quad{}
11004 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11008 \begin_inset space ~
11012 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11015 em) space between the arrows.
11018 \begin_layout Description
11020 \begin_inset space ~
11024 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11028 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11032 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
11036 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11040 \begin_inset space ~
11044 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11047 em) space between the arrows.
11050 \begin_layout Description
11052 \begin_inset space ~
11056 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11060 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
11065 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11069 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11072 cm space between the arrows.
11075 \begin_layout Standard
11077 \begin_inset space ~
11081 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11083 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
11087 lists the different space sizes.
11090 \begin_layout Standard
11091 \begin_inset Float table
11096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11097 \begin_inset Caption Standard
11099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11100 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11102 name "tab:Width-of-the"
11106 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
11114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11116 \begin_inset Tabular
11117 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
11118 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
11119 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11120 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11122 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11133 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11146 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11155 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11160 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11170 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11179 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11184 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11194 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11203 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11208 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11218 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11227 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11232 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11236 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
11240 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11250 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11259 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11264 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11274 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11283 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11288 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11298 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11303 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11311 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11316 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11326 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11331 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11339 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11344 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11354 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11359 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11367 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11372 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11393 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11395 \begin_inset Index idx
11398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11407 \begin_layout Standard
11408 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
11409 feature for adding extra space
11410 in a uniform fashion.
11411 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
11412 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
11413 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
11414 equally between themselves.
11417 \begin_layout Standard
11418 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
11421 \begin_layout Quote
11423 This is on the left side
11424 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11427 This is on the right
11430 \begin_layout Quote
11433 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11437 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11443 \begin_layout Quote
11446 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11450 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11454 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11460 \begin_layout Standard
11461 That was an example in the
11467 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11471 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11475 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11478 is one in a standard paragraph.
11479 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
11483 sitting in-between the two arrows.
11486 \begin_layout Standard
11487 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
11490 \begin_inset space ~
11495 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
11498 \begin_layout Standard
11500 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
11504 \begin_inset space ~
11510 \begin_layout Standard
11512 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
11516 \begin_inset space ~
11522 \begin_layout Standard
11524 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
11528 \begin_inset space ~
11534 \begin_layout Standard
11536 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
11540 \begin_inset space ~
11546 \begin_layout Standard
11548 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
11552 \begin_inset space ~
11558 \begin_layout Standard
11560 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
11564 \begin_inset space ~
11570 \begin_layout Standard
11571 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11579 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
11583 in the first line in a paragraph, \SpecialChar LyX
11585 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
11586 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
11590 option in the space dialog.
11598 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11600 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11602 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
11607 \begin_inset Index idx
11610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11619 \begin_layout Standard
11620 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
11621 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
11624 \begin_layout Standard
11625 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11628 What is correct English?:
11629 \begin_inset Newline newline
11633 \begin_inset Newline newline
11637 \begin_inset space ~
11640 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
11641 \begin_inset Newline newline
11645 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11656 \begin_inset Newline newline
11660 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11671 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11677 \begin_layout Standard
11679 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
11680 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11684 \begin_inset space ~
11688 \begin_inset space ~
11692 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11696 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
11698 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11699 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11703 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
11705 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11709 \begin_inset space ~
11713 \begin_inset space ~
11717 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11720 into the phantom inset (note the space after
11721 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11725 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11729 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
11730 That is why it is named
11731 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11735 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11739 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
11740 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
11744 \begin_layout Subsection
11746 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11748 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
11753 \begin_inset Index idx
11756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11765 \begin_layout Standard
11766 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
11768 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11769 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11771 \begin_inset space ~
11777 There you find the following sizes:
11780 \begin_layout Standard
11793 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
11794 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
11799 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
11801 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
11802 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
11804 \begin_inset space ~
11810 \begin_inset Index idx
11813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11814 Document ! Settings
11819 for the paragraph separation.
11820 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
11831 \begin_layout Standard
11837 \begin_inset Index idx
11840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11846 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
11847 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
11852 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
11853 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
11862 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
11866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11871 s are described in section
11872 \begin_inset space ~
11876 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11878 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
11887 If there are several
11891 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
11892 You can therefore use
11896 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
11899 \begin_layout Standard
11904 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
11905 \begin_inset space ~
11909 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11911 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
11918 \begin_layout Standard
11919 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11929 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
11930 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
11942 \begin_layout Subsection
11943 Paragraph Alignment
11944 \begin_inset Index idx
11947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11948 Paragraph ! Alignment
11956 \begin_layout Standard
11957 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
11959 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
11962 dialog (toolbar button
11965 arg "layout-paragraph"
11969 There are five possibilities:
11972 \begin_layout Itemize
11980 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
11986 \begin_layout Itemize
11994 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
12000 \begin_layout Itemize
12008 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
12014 \begin_layout Itemize
12022 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
12028 \begin_layout Itemize
12036 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
12042 \begin_layout Standard
12043 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
12044 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
12045 the left and right margins.
12046 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
12049 \begin_layout Standard
12051 This paragraph is right aligned,
12054 \begin_layout Standard
12056 this one is centered,
12059 \begin_layout Standard
12061 this one is left aligned.
12064 \begin_layout Subsection
12066 \begin_inset Index idx
12069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12070 Page breaks ! Forced
12076 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12078 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
12085 \begin_layout Standard
12086 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
12087 does the page breaks in your document, you can
12088 force a page break where you want one.
12089 Normally this will not be necessary, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
12090 is good at page breaking.
12091 Only if you use a lot of
12095 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
12096 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
12099 \begin_layout Standard
12100 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
12101 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
12105 have to change the page breaking.
12108 \begin_layout Standard
12109 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
12111 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
12113 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12114 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12116 \begin_inset space ~
12122 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
12124 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12125 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12127 \begin_inset space ~
12132 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
12134 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
12135 on which only the last few lines are absent.
12138 \begin_layout Standard
12139 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
12140 at the top of a page.
12141 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
12143 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
12144 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
12145 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
12147 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12149 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
12153 to learn more about
12160 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12162 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12164 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
12169 \begin_inset Index idx
12172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12173 Page breaks ! Clear
12181 \begin_layout Standard
12182 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
12183 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
12184 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
12185 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
12186 it, if necessary by adding pages.
12189 \begin_layout Standard
12190 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
12192 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12193 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12195 \begin_inset space ~
12201 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
12203 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12204 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12206 \begin_inset space ~
12210 \begin_inset space ~
12215 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
12216 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
12219 \begin_layout Subsection
12221 \begin_inset Index idx
12224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12231 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12233 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
12240 \begin_layout Standard
12241 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
12243 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
12245 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12246 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12248 \begin_inset space ~
12252 \begin_inset space ~
12260 arg "newline-insert newline"
12264 Another type that is inserted via the menu
12266 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12267 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12269 \begin_inset space ~
12273 \begin_inset space ~
12281 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
12284 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
12286 This is useful to avoid
12287 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12291 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12294 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
12297 \begin_layout Standard
12298 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
12299 's line breaking, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
12301 very good at line breaking.
12302 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessary to set
12303 a line break actively, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
12304 \begin_inset space ~
12308 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12310 reference "sec:Quote"
12315 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12317 reference "sec:Verse"
12322 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12324 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
12331 \begin_layout Subsection
12333 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12335 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
12340 \begin_inset Index idx
12343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12352 \begin_layout Standard
12354 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12365 \begin_layout Standard
12369 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12370 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12372 \begin_inset space ~
12377 you can insert horizontal lines.
12378 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
12379 of the current text line or the paragraph.
12380 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
12383 \begin_layout Standard
12385 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12396 \begin_layout Section
12397 Characters and Symbols
12400 \begin_layout Standard
12401 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
12402 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
12403 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
12405 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12409 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12411 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
12415 for information on how this is done.
12418 \begin_layout Standard
12419 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
12424 dialog via the menu
12426 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12427 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
12433 \begin_layout Standard
12434 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12442 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
12443 when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
12445 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
12453 \begin_layout Section
12454 Fonts and Text Styles
12455 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12457 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
12464 \begin_layout Subsection
12466 \begin_inset Index idx
12469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12478 \begin_layout Standard
12479 There are two types of fonts:
12482 \begin_layout Description
12484 \begin_inset space ~
12488 \begin_inset Index idx
12491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12497 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
12498 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12502 characters) in the font.
12503 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
12504 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
12505 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
12506 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
12507 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
12508 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
12509 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
12510 \begin_inset Newline newline
12513 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
12514 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
12515 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
12516 sizes than at small ones.
12517 \begin_inset Newline newline
12531 \begin_inset space ~
12539 \begin_layout Description
12541 \begin_inset space ~
12545 \begin_inset Index idx
12548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12554 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
12555 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
12556 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
12557 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
12558 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
12559 image manipulation program.
12560 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
12561 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
12562 \begin_inset space ~
12565 pixels high up to 34
12566 \begin_inset space ~
12569 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
12570 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
12571 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
12573 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
12574 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
12575 \begin_inset Newline newline
12578 Bitmap fonts are named
12581 \begin_inset space ~
12586 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
12589 \begin_layout Standard
12590 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
12591 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
12592 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
12593 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
12594 use scalable fonts.
12597 \begin_layout Standard
12598 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
12601 \begin_layout Standard
12602 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
12603 specifying character styles rather than specifying a particular font.
12604 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
12605 font to emphasize text, you use an
12606 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12610 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12614 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
12616 In \SpecialChar LyX
12617 , you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
12621 \begin_layout Subsection
12624 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12626 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12633 \begin_layout Standard
12634 Traditionally, \SpecialChar LaTeX
12635 used its own fonts.
12636 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
12637 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12640 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12641 needs some extra information about the fonts, which
12642 have to be provided by additional files and packages.
12643 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
12644 to a word processor.
12645 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
12646 are generally of very good quality, and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12647 files are very portable across
12648 different machines.
12649 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
12650 has increased a lot
12651 in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
12654 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
12656 \begin_inset space ~
12660 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12662 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
12667 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
12668 code in the document
12669 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
12672 \begin_layout Standard
12673 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
12674 engines that are also able directly
12675 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12677 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12679 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
12681 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
12682 that is installed on your system.
12683 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
12686 \begin_layout Standard
12687 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12695 In practice, some fonts might fail due to a legacy (non Unicode) font encoding,
12696 bad metrics, or other font deficiencies; so you might have to experiment.
12704 \begin_layout Subsection
12705 Document Font and Font size
12706 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12708 name "subsec:Document-Font"
12713 \begin_inset Index idx
12716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12723 \begin_inset Index idx
12726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12735 \begin_layout Standard
12736 You can set the document fonts in the
12738 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
12742 \begin_inset Index idx
12745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12746 Document ! Settings
12756 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
12757 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
12760 \begin_inset space ~
12769 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
12771 \begin_inset space ~
12774 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
12777 \begin_layout Standard
12782 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
12783 This requires that you use
12795 as the output format, i.
12796 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12800 \begin_inset space \space{}
12803 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12804 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12805 installed (see section
12806 \begin_inset space ~
12810 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12812 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12817 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
12819 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
12820 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
12822 \begin_inset space ~
12825 serif, and typewriter), since \SpecialChar LyX
12826 cannot determine the family.
12827 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
12828 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
12831 cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
12834 \begin_layout Standard
12835 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
12836 fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the font
12841 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12847 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
12848 With LyX's default font encoding, this is a look-alike of the standard
12851 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12857 \begin_inset space ~
12863 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12871 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12879 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12883 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12888 European Computer Modern
12891 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12899 However, some classes set different default fonts.
12902 \begin_layout Standard
12907 is a bitmap font, it looks pixelated in PDF output, especially when you
12908 read the PDF in a zoomed size.
12912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12913 This problem is less severe if you read PDFs in
12916 \begin_inset space ~
12921 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
12927 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
12928 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
12931 \begin_layout Itemize
12935 \begin_inset space ~
12940 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
12953 \begin_inset space ~
12958 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
12959 community in order to replace
12963 as the default font.
12964 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
12965 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
12968 \begin_inset space ~
12981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12982 One difference is improved kerning.
12990 \begin_layout Itemize
12991 If you do not like the look of
12999 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
13000 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13004 \begin_inset space ~
13010 \begin_inset space ~
13020 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
13021 \begin_inset space ~
13024 serif and typewriter fonts,
13028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13029 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
13030 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13036 \begin_inset space ~
13045 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
13046 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13050 \begin_inset space \space{}
13058 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13062 \begin_inset space \space{}
13068 \begin_inset space ~
13076 \begin_inset space ~
13086 but you can also select your own.
13087 \begin_inset Newline newline
13090 The differences between roman,
13093 \begin_inset space ~
13102 fonts are explained in section
13103 \begin_inset space ~
13107 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13109 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13114 \begin_inset Newline newline
13120 \begin_inset space ~
13125 was originally designed for newspapers.
13126 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
13127 into the small newspaper columns.
13131 \begin_inset space ~
13136 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
13139 \begin_layout Standard
13140 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
13153 Some classes provide additional sizes.
13158 depends on the class you are using.
13159 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
13162 \begin_layout Standard
13163 Note that the font size is the
13168 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
13169 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used
13170 in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
13171 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
13174 \begin_inset space ~
13180 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
13181 \begin_inset space ~
13185 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13187 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13194 \begin_layout Standard
13198 \begin_inset space ~
13203 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
13205 \begin_inset space ~
13208 serif or typewriter.
13213 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
13223 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
13226 \begin_layout Standard
13231 LaTeX font encoding
13233 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
13234 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13240 \begin_inset Index idx
13243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13251 \begin_inset space ~
13255 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13257 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
13262 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
13263 Unless you have specific reasons, use
13270 \begin_layout Standard
13271 With some fonts, the checkboxes
13273 Use Old Style Figures
13277 Use True Small Caps
13280 These are extra features some fonts provide.
13283 Use Old Style Figures
13285 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
13287 Old style figures are the numerals (0
13288 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13292 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13295 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
13299 Use True Small Caps
13301 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
13302 of scaled capitals.
13303 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
13304 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
13307 \begin_layout Standard
13312 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
13313 a font to display the script characters.
13317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13318 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13324 \begin_inset Index idx
13327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13334 So this has no effect for the document language
13350 \begin_layout Standard
13353 Enable micro-typographic extensions
13355 activates extensions such as character protrusion and font expansion via
13356 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13362 \begin_inset Index idx
13365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13367 packages ! microtype
13376 \begin_layout Standard
13379 Disallow line breaks after dashes
13381 outputs en- and em-dashes as literal characters
13385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13386 Or \SpecialChar LaTeX
13387 macro, if the literal character is not supported by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13393 instead of ligatures (--, ---) (see section
13394 \begin_inset space ~
13398 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13400 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
13410 \begin_layout Standard
13411 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
13415 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13423 When you choose a new font or font size, \SpecialChar LyX
13428 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
13429 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
13431 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
13433 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
13436 dialog, see section
13437 \begin_inset space ~
13441 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13443 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
13455 \begin_layout Subsection
13459 \begin_layout Standard
13460 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
13461 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document
13463 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
13464 fonts for your document, you can explicitly
13465 choose a math font in the dialog
13467 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13471 \begin_inset Index idx
13474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13475 Document ! Settings
13481 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
13482 automatically selects a math font.
13483 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
13484 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
13487 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13493 \begin_inset space ~
13499 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13504 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the
13505 document font is available.
13508 \begin_layout Standard
13509 Note that the math font will not be used for
13513 (which is inserted with the shortcut
13519 or by the insertion of the command
13526 Also note that some math fonts are sans
13527 \begin_inset space ~
13531 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
13532 while the math characters do not.
13534 \begin_inset space ~
13537 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
13540 \begin_inset space ~
13548 \begin_inset space ~
13553 in the document font settings.
13556 \begin_layout Standard
13557 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
13558 fonts for the document, you can only choose for math to
13559 use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
13560 font (in most cases
13561 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13567 \begin_inset space ~
13573 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13576 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
13577 variant of the document's class default font (in most
13579 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13585 \begin_inset space ~
13591 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13597 \begin_layout Subsection
13598 Using Different Character Styles
13599 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13601 name "subsec:charstyles"
13606 \begin_inset Index idx
13609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13616 \begin_inset Index idx
13619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13628 \begin_layout Standard
13629 As we've already seen, \SpecialChar LyX
13630 automatically changes the style for certain paragraph
13632 In this section, we will explain how the style of selected text passages
13634 This is where we meet the concept of
13641 \begin_layout Standard
13642 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
13643 supports two character styles,
13657 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13660 e., available with all document classes.
13661 On top of that, some document classes and modules provide
13663 custom character styles
13665 for specific purposes.
13666 We describe both types of characters styles in a minute.
13669 \begin_layout Standard
13670 Before we do that, though, allow us just a few words of what we mean by
13680 Traditional word processors used to focus on so-called
13684 : if you wanted to emphasize a word, you selected it and chose e.
13685 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13690 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13694 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13697 — you customized the
13702 Modern processors, \SpecialChar LyX
13703 among them, encourage the use of
13715 instead (although formal markup is still possible; see section
13716 \begin_inset space ~
13720 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13722 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13727 Rather than fiddling with
13731 , they encourage the use of
13743 , who are defined with regard to their function (e.
13744 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13748 \begin_inset Quotes els
13752 \begin_inset Quotes ers
13755 ), not their form (
13756 \begin_inset Quotes els
13760 \begin_inset Quotes ers
13764 There are many advantages of the semantic approach.
13765 To begin with, using functional categories keeps you thinking about why
13766 you are actually marking up, if your markup is consistent and systematic,
13767 and whether this particular markup makes sense.
13768 On a more practical level, it is easy to change the appearance if needed.
13769 Consider the case when you are writing a paper and set all proper names
13775 Now if the publisher requests to have names appear differently (e.
13776 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13779 g., in normal font, or ALL-CAPS), you would have to change any single occurrence.
13780 With a semantic markup (such as
13784 ; see below), you'd just need to change the definition of
13789 It's a ten second change (if you know how to change the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13791 Moreover, semantic markup even allows you to produce different versions
13792 of a document, using different markup semantics.
13795 \begin_layout Standard
13796 With that in mind, we now turn to the semantic character styles that are
13797 provided by \SpecialChar LyX
13801 \begin_layout Subsubsection
13802 Builtin Character Styles
13803 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13805 name "subsec:Builtin-Character-Styles"
13812 \begin_layout Standard
13813 The two builtin character styles can be activated via the
13817 dialog, key bindings, and the toolbar.
13820 \begin_layout Standard
13825 style, do one of the following:
13828 \begin_layout Itemize
13829 click on the toolbar button
13838 \begin_layout Itemize
13839 use the key binding
13848 \begin_layout Itemize
13856 arg "dialog-show character"
13862 arg "dialog-show character"
13865 ) as described in section
13866 \begin_inset space ~
13870 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13872 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13879 \begin_layout Standard
13880 These commands are all toggles.
13885 style is already active, they deactivate it.
13888 \begin_layout Standard
13889 One typically uses the
13893 style for proper names.
13895 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13902 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
13904 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13910 \begin_layout Standard
13915 is producing text in
13919 , but the definition can be changed.
13922 \begin_layout Standard
13923 A more widely used character style is the
13928 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
13935 \begin_layout Itemize
13936 clicking on the toolbar button
13945 \begin_layout Itemize
13946 using the keybindings
13955 \begin_layout Itemize
13963 arg "dialog-show character"
13969 arg "dialog-show character"
13972 ) as described in section
13973 \begin_inset space ~
13977 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13979 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13986 \begin_layout Standard
13991 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
13993 use a different font, and you can also customize it yourself by changing
13994 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13998 \begin_layout Standard
13999 We've been using the
14003 style all over the place in this document.
14004 Here's one more example:
14007 \begin_layout Quotation
14010 Do not overuse character styles!
14013 \begin_layout Standard
14014 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
14015 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
14016 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
14017 the common tendency to overuse character styles.
14021 \begin_layout Standard
14022 In contrast to the custom character styles, the builtin styles are represented
14023 only as font changes and integrated in the
14028 You can therefore always reset to the default font using the key binding
14038 arg "dialog-show character"
14044 arg "dialog-show character"
14050 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14051 Custom Character Styles
14052 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14054 name "subsec:Custom-Character-Styles"
14061 \begin_layout Standard
14062 Custom character styles can be provided by the document class, a module
14064 \begin_inset space ~
14068 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14070 reference "subsec:Modules"
14077 ), or local layout settings (see section
14078 \begin_inset space ~
14082 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14084 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
14089 As the two builtin styles, they provide
14093 markup for specific functions.
14094 For instance, \SpecialChar LyX
14099 module that provides, among other things, some custom character styles
14100 to markup linguistic levels:
14109 \begin_inset Quotes els
14113 \begin_inset Quotes ers
14119 \begin_layout Standard
14120 These styles can be found, if available, in the
14122 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14128 \begin_layout Standard
14129 For the purpose of demonstration, we have loaded in this document the optional
14134 that replicates and extends the two builtin styles.
14135 By example of the emphasized style, we can see the differences in look
14136 and feel (although the result in the typeset output is the same): while
14141 appears as normal font change, the custom character style
14142 \begin_inset Flex Emph
14145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14151 appears as an inset, with a label below that identifies its semantics.
14152 This is the way all custom character styles look and feel like.
14153 For instance, the three others from the module we have loaded are:
14154 \begin_inset Flex Code
14157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14164 \begin_inset Flex Strong
14167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14174 \begin_inset Flex Noun
14177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14184 Note that custom character styles might (as in the example) or might not
14185 emulate on screen their formal appearance.
14188 \begin_layout Subsection
14189 Tweaking Text Properties with the
14194 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14196 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14201 \begin_inset Index idx
14204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14213 \begin_layout Standard
14214 There are always occasions when you will need to do some formal fine-tuning;
14215 so \SpecialChar LyX
14216 gives you a way to customize the properties of text passages.
14217 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
14218 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
14219 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
14220 from ordinary dialog.
14223 \begin_layout Standard
14224 If there are no custom character styles provided by the document class or
14225 a module for this purpose (which is, as written above, generally the better
14226 way of handling such issues), you often find yourself wanting to quickly
14227 tweak the properties of the respective text passages.
14232 comes in as a last resort.
14235 \begin_layout Standard
14236 Before we document how to tweak the text properties, we want to issue a
14237 warning yet again: Don't overuse that!
14238 \begin_inset Newline newline
14241 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
14242 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
14245 \begin_layout Standard
14246 To tweak text properties, open the
14249 arg "dialog-show character"
14252 dialog or press the toolbar button
14255 arg "dialog-show character"
14259 There are several combo boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
14260 text property that you can choose.
14261 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
14264 \begin_inset space ~
14269 , which keeps the current state of that property.
14274 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
14275 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
14276 environments all at once.
14279 \begin_layout Standard
14280 The text properties, and their options (in addition to
14283 \begin_inset space ~
14295 \begin_layout Labeling
14296 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14302 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14306 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14310 The possible options are:
14314 \begin_layout Labeling
14315 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14320 This is the Roman font family.
14321 Normally a serif font.
14322 It's also the default family.
14332 \begin_layout Labeling
14333 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14337 \begin_inset space ~
14344 This is the Sans Serif font family.
14356 \begin_layout Labeling
14357 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14364 This is the Typewriter font family.
14370 arg "font-typewriter"
14378 \begin_layout Standard
14379 The general differences of these families are:
14382 \begin_layout Itemize
14387 fonts use characters with serifs.
14388 These are the small
14389 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14393 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14396 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
14397 The following example shows the difference:
14398 \begin_inset Newline newline
14402 \begin_inset Newline newline
14407 text without serifs
14410 \begin_inset Newline newline
14413 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
14414 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
14421 \begin_layout Itemize
14426 is not recommended for use as a base type.
14427 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
14428 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
14431 \begin_layout Itemize
14437 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14441 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14444 font, which means every character has the same width; the
14445 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14449 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14453 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14457 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14462 \begin_inset Newline newline
14466 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
14469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14480 \begin_inset Note Note
14483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14484 For more on phantoms see section
14485 \begin_inset space ~
14489 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14491 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
14501 \begin_inset Newline newline
14508 \begin_layout Labeling
14509 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14514 This corresponds to the print weight.
14519 \begin_layout Labeling
14520 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14525 This is the Medium font series.
14526 It's also the default series.
14529 \begin_layout Labeling
14530 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14537 This is the Bold font series.
14550 \begin_layout Labeling
14551 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14556 As the name implies.
14561 \begin_layout Labeling
14562 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14567 This is the Upright font shape.
14568 It's also the default shape.
14571 \begin_layout Labeling
14572 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14583 is the Italic font shape
14589 \begin_layout Labeling
14590 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14597 This is the Slanted font shape
14599 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
14600 , this is different from italic).
14603 \begin_layout Labeling
14604 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14608 \begin_inset space ~
14615 This is the Small caps font shape
14622 \begin_layout Labeling
14623 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14628 Alters the text color.
14629 Note that not all DVI viewers are able to display colors.
14634 , which means that the document default color set in
14636 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
14637 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
14643 \begin_inset space ~
14648 is used, you can select
14725 \begin_inset Index idx
14728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14737 \begin_layout Labeling
14738 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14743 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
14744 the language of the document.
14745 Text marked in this way will be underlined in the \SpecialChar LyX
14746 workarea in blue to
14747 indicate the change.
14748 \begin_inset Newline newline
14751 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
14753 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
14754 When using the spell checking (see section
14755 \begin_inset space ~
14759 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14761 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
14765 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
14768 \begin_layout Labeling
14769 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14774 Alters the size of the font.
14775 You won't find numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually proportio
14776 nal to the document font size.
14777 Once again, you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
14778 the details, but a general description of what
14784 \begin_layout Labeling
14785 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14793 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14797 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14806 arg "font-size tiny"
14812 \begin_layout Labeling
14813 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14821 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14825 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14834 arg "font-size scriptsize"
14840 \begin_layout Labeling
14841 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14849 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14853 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14862 arg "font-size footnotesize"
14868 \begin_layout Labeling
14869 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14877 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14881 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14890 arg "font-size small"
14896 \begin_layout Labeling
14897 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14903 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14907 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14911 It's also the default size.
14915 arg "font-size normal"
14921 \begin_layout Labeling
14922 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14930 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14934 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14943 arg "font-size large"
14949 \begin_layout Labeling
14950 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14958 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14962 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14971 arg "font-size larger"
14977 \begin_layout Labeling
14978 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14986 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14990 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14999 arg "font-size largest"
15005 \begin_layout Labeling
15006 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15014 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15018 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15027 arg "font-size huge"
15033 \begin_layout Labeling
15034 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15042 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15046 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15055 arg "font-size giant"
15061 \begin_layout Labeling
15062 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15067 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
15068 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15072 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15076 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15080 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15087 arg "font-size increase"
15093 \begin_layout Labeling
15094 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15099 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
15100 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15104 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15108 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15112 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15119 arg "font-size decrease"
15126 \begin_layout Standard
15131 : don't go crazy with this feature.
15132 You should almost never need to change the font size.
15134 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
15135 — use those instead.
15136 This is here for fine-tuning only!
15139 \begin_layout Labeling
15140 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15145 Here you can have text passages being underlined.
15146 Avoid using underlining if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter
15147 days, when you could not change fonts.
15148 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
15149 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
15150 because some people
15154 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
15159 \begin_layout Labeling
15160 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15165 Don't use underlining.
15168 \begin_layout Labeling
15169 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15176 This is text with Single underlining on.
15182 arg "font-underline"
15188 \begin_inset Newline newline
15194 \begin_layout Labeling
15195 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15202 This is text with Double underlining on.
15208 arg "font-underunderline"
15214 \begin_layout Labeling
15215 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15222 This is text with Wavy underlining on.
15228 arg "font-underwave"
15232 \begin_inset Newline newline
15235 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
15236 Keep antinausea pills handy.
15240 \begin_layout Labeling
15241 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15246 lets you strike-through text passages in two ways:
15250 \begin_layout Labeling
15251 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15256 Don't use strikethrough.
15259 \begin_layout Labeling
15260 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15267 This is text with Single strikethrough on.
15273 arg "font-strikeout"
15277 \begin_inset Newline newline
15280 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
15281 changed in the meantime.
15284 \begin_layout Labeling
15285 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15289 \begin_inset space ~
15296 This is text with /-strikethrough on.
15299 \begin_inset Newline newline
15302 This is used to make text hardly readable.
15306 \begin_layout Standard
15307 In addition to all the formal markup described above, the dialog also provides
15308 you access to the two builtin semantic character styles (see section
15309 \begin_inset space ~
15313 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15315 reference "subsec:Builtin-Character-Styles"
15322 \begin_layout Itemize
15329 This is text with emphasize on
15334 \begin_layout Itemize
15341 This is text with Noun on.
15344 \begin_layout Standard
15345 So you have a huge number of combinations to select from.
15346 Once you have applied a text property via the
15349 arg "dialog-show character"
15355 arg "dialog-show character"
15358 ) dialog, the settings are temporarily saved.
15359 You can activate the last applied properties by using the toolbar button
15363 arg "textstyle-apply"
15367 The button lets you apply those even when the dialog isn't visible.
15370 \begin_layout Standard
15371 To completely reset the text properties of a selection to the default, use
15382 \begin_layout Standard
15383 We conclude this section with the same warning once again: Do not overuse
15384 the fonts! They are, more often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute
15388 \begin_layout Section
15389 Printing and Previewing
15392 \begin_layout Subsection
15396 \begin_layout Standard
15397 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
15398 using \SpecialChar LyX
15399 , you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
15400 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
15401 goes on behind-the-scenes.
15402 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
15404 Additional Features
15409 \begin_layout Standard
15411 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
15414 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
15415 typesetting system, but to prevent confusion,
15416 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
15419 is what you use to do your actual writing.
15420 Then, \SpecialChar LyX
15421 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15422 to turn your writing into printable output.
15423 This happens in two stages:
15426 \begin_layout Enumerate
15427 First, \SpecialChar LyX
15428 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
15430 a file with the extension,
15431 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15439 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15445 \begin_layout Enumerate
15446 Next, \SpecialChar LyX
15447 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15448 to use the commands in the
15452 file to produce printable output.
15455 \begin_layout Subsection
15456 Output file formats
15457 \begin_inset Index idx
15460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15467 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15469 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
15476 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15477 Simple text (ASCII)
15478 \begin_inset Index idx
15481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15482 File formats ! ASCII
15490 \begin_layout Standard
15491 This file type has the extension
15492 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15500 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15504 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
15505 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15508 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
15509 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15515 \begin_layout Standard
15516 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
15518 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15519 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15521 \begin_inset space ~
15527 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
15528 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
15529 bibliography (section
15530 \begin_inset space ~
15534 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15536 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
15541 If your document includes such material, use
15543 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15544 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15546 \begin_inset space ~
15550 \begin_inset space ~
15554 \begin_inset space ~
15562 \begin_inset space ~
15566 \begin_inset space ~
15572 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
15573 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
15576 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15579 \begin_inset Index idx
15582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15583 File formats ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
15592 \begin_layout Standard
15593 This file type has the extension
15594 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15602 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15605 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15608 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
15609 , you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
15610 -Errors or to process it manually
15611 with console commands.
15612 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
15613 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
15614 's temporary directory whenever you
15615 view or export your document.
15618 \begin_layout Standard
15619 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
15620 -file using the menu
15622 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15623 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15627 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
15628 export variants are explained in section
15629 \begin_inset space ~
15633 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15635 reference "subsec:Export"
15642 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15644 \begin_inset Index idx
15647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15656 \begin_layout Standard
15657 This file type has the extension
15658 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15666 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15671 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15675 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15678 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
15679 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
15680 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
15684 \begin_layout Standard
15685 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
15686 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
15687 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
15688 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
15689 when you view the DVI.
15690 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
15693 \begin_layout Standard
15694 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
15696 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15697 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15702 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15703 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15705 \begin_inset space ~
15711 The latter option uses the program
15713 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15719 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15722 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15723 font access (see section
15724 \begin_inset space ~
15728 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15730 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15735 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15736 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15741 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15743 \begin_inset Index idx
15746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15747 File formats ! PostScript
15755 \begin_layout Standard
15756 This file type has the extension
15757 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15765 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15769 PostScript was developed by the company
15773 as a printer language.
15774 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
15776 PostScript can be seen as a
15777 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15780 programming language
15781 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15784 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
15788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15789 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15796 \begin_inset Index idx
15799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15801 packages ! pstricks
15811 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
15814 \begin_layout Standard
15815 PostScript can only contain images in the format
15816 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15819 Encapsulated PostScript
15820 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15823 (EPS, file extension
15824 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15832 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15836 As \SpecialChar LyX
15837 allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has to
15838 convert them in the background to EPS.
15839 If, for example, you have 50
15840 \begin_inset space ~
15843 images in your document, \SpecialChar LyX
15845 \begin_inset space ~
15848 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
15849 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
15851 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
15852 EPS to avoid this problem.
15855 \begin_layout Standard
15856 You can export to PostScript using the menu
15858 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15859 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15865 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15867 \begin_inset Index idx
15870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15877 \begin_inset Index idx
15880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15889 \begin_layout Standard
15890 This file type has the extension
15891 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15899 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15904 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15907 Portable Document Format
15908 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15915 was derived from PostScript.
15916 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
15918 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15922 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15925 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
15926 looks exactly the same.
15929 \begin_layout Standard
15930 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
15931 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15934 Joint Photographic Experts Group
15935 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15938 (JPG, file extension
15939 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15947 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15951 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15959 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15963 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15966 Portable Network Graphics
15967 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15970 (PNG, file extension
15971 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15979 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15983 You can also use any other image format, because \SpecialChar LyX
15984 converts them in the
15985 background to one of these formats.
15986 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
15987 will slow down your workflow.
15988 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
15991 \begin_layout Standard
15992 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
15994 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16000 \begin_layout Description
16002 \begin_inset space ~
16005 (pdflatex) This uses the program
16009 which converts your file directly to PDF.
16012 \begin_layout Description
16014 \begin_inset space ~
16021 ) This uses the program
16023 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
16026 which converts your file directly to PDF.
16029 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
16032 is a new engine, derived from
16036 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
16037 access (see section
16038 \begin_inset space ~
16042 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16044 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
16049 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
16050 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
16055 \begin_layout Description
16057 \begin_inset space ~
16064 ) This uses the program
16069 that converts your file directly to PDF.
16075 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
16076 font access (see section
16077 \begin_inset space ~
16081 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16083 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
16088 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
16089 vertically written Japanese.
16092 \begin_layout Description
16094 \begin_inset space ~
16097 (cropped) This is the same as
16100 \begin_inset space ~
16105 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
16106 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
16107 to generate good-looking
16108 formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
16111 \begin_layout Description
16113 \begin_inset space ~
16116 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
16120 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
16124 \begin_layout Description
16126 \begin_inset space ~
16129 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
16133 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
16134 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
16138 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
16139 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
16142 \begin_layout Standard
16146 \begin_inset space ~
16155 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
16156 works without problems.
16157 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
16158 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
16162 \begin_inset space ~
16170 \begin_inset space ~
16175 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
16183 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16185 \begin_inset Index idx
16188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16189 FileFormats ! XHTML
16195 \begin_inset Index idx
16198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16207 \begin_layout Standard
16208 This file type has the extension
16209 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16217 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16221 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
16222 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
16223 When \SpecialChar LyX
16224 produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
16225 suitable for the purpose.
16226 For the math output you can choose in the menu
16228 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16229 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
16232 between different formats, which are described in section
16234 Math Output in XHTML
16239 \begin_inset space ~
16247 \begin_layout Standard
16248 XHTML output remains
16249 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16253 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16256 , and not all \SpecialChar LyX
16257 features are supported yet.
16261 and the World Wide Web
16265 Additional Features
16267 manual, for more information.
16270 \begin_layout Standard
16271 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
16273 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16274 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16280 \begin_layout Subsection
16282 \begin_inset Index idx
16285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16294 \begin_layout Standard
16295 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
16296 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
16305 or use the toolbar button
16312 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
16313 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see section
16314 \begin_inset space ~
16318 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16320 reference "sec:File-Formats"
16324 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
16326 \begin_inset space ~
16330 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16332 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
16337 Further output formats can be selected via
16339 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16340 View (Other Formats)
16342 or the toolbar button
16351 \begin_layout Standard
16352 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
16353 viewer window using the menu
16355 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16360 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16361 Update (Other Formats)
16366 \begin_layout Standard
16367 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
16370 To have a real output, export your document.
16373 \begin_layout Section
16374 A few Words about Typography
16375 \begin_inset Index idx
16378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16387 \begin_layout Subsection
16388 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
16389 \begin_inset Index idx
16392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16399 \begin_inset Index idx
16402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16411 \begin_layout Standard
16412 In \SpecialChar LyX
16414 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16422 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16425 symbol comes in four variants: the
16442 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16448 \begin_layout Standard
16449 \begin_inset Box Frameless
16459 height_special "totalheight"
16464 backgroundcolor "none"
16467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16468 \begin_inset Tabular
16469 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
16470 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
16471 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
16472 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16473 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16474 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16475 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16484 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16493 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16503 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16504 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16513 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16522 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16526 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16534 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16543 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16544 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16553 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16562 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16566 system key combination
16570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16571 On Mac and Linux, the en dash is entered with
16574 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16578 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16583 and the em dash with
16586 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16590 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16599 is the Mac label for the right
16610 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16614 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16623 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16624 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16633 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16642 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16646 system key combination or
16647 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16651 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16661 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16670 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16674 \begin_inset Formula $-$
16682 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16686 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16694 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16713 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16719 \begin_layout Standard
16720 Dashes can also be inserted with
16722 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16724 \begin_inset space ~
16727 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16735 function with the Unicode code point as argument (2013 for the em dash
16736 and 2014 for the en dash).
16739 \begin_layout Standard
16740 Hyphen and dashes are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in math
16741 mode and has a length of its own.
16742 Here are some examples:
16745 \begin_layout Enumerate
16746 line- and page-breaks
16747 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16757 \begin_layout Enumerate
16759 \begin_inset space ~
16763 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16773 \begin_layout Enumerate
16774 The em dash is used without spaces: Oh—there's a dash.
16775 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16785 \begin_layout Enumerate
16786 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
16790 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16800 \begin_layout Standard
16802 \begin_inset CommandInset href
16804 name "Wikipedia entry on dashes"
16805 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dash"
16813 \begin_layout Subsection
16814 Dashes and Line Breaks
16815 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16817 name "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
16824 \begin_layout Standard
16825 Whether line breaks before or after dashes are allowed depends on the use
16826 case and locale, e.
16827 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16833 \begin_layout Itemize
16834 In English, line breaks are generally allowed after the dash, but no line
16835 break should occur if only a single character follows the dash (as in A–Z).
16838 \begin_layout Itemize
16839 In English, dashes used to set off parenthetical statements should not start
16843 \begin_layout Itemize
16844 In French and Spanish, dashes around parenthetical statements are treated
16845 similar to brackets: line breaks are not allowed on the inner side.
16848 \begin_layout Standard
16849 By default, dashes are output by \SpecialChar LyX
16850 to \SpecialChar LaTeX
16852 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16856 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16861 allows line breaks after hyphens, en-dashes and em-dashes.
16864 \begin_layout Enumerate
16865 Line breaks before spaced en dashes
16866 \begin_inset space ~
16869 – common in British English and generally recommended by
16871 The Elements of Typographic Style
16874 \begin_inset space ~
16877 – can be prevented using protected spaces.
16880 \begin_layout Enumerate
16881 Unwanted line breaks after dashes can be prevented by wrapping in a makebox
16885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16888 Prevent Hyphenation
16893 \begin_inset space ~
16909 in \SpecialChar TeX
16915 \begin_layout Itemize
16917 \begin_inset space ~
16921 \begin_inset Box Frameless
16931 height_special "totalheight"
16936 backgroundcolor "none"
16939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16948 \begin_layout Itemize
16952 \begin_inset Box Frameless
16962 height_special "totalheight"
16967 backgroundcolor "none"
16970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16974 \begin_inset space ~
16982 si tout le monde ne les aime pas
16983 \begin_inset space ~
16986 – sont très utiles.
16989 \begin_layout Itemize
16996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17005 —un inciso con rayas— se escribe así.
17009 \begin_layout Standard
17010 An incorrect line break is easily overlooked because
17011 \begin_inset space ~
17014 – in contrast to an overfull line
17015 \begin_inset space ~
17018 – it does not trigger a warning in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17022 \begin_layout Standard
17023 If you want to globally disable line breaks after dashes, you can select
17026 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17027 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
17028 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
17029 Disallow line breaks after dashes
17034 \begin_layout Enumerate
17035 Line breaks are still allowed after spaced dashes.
17036 They can be prevented using protected spaces (without need for a makebox
17037 or \SpecialChar TeX
17043 \begin_layout Itemize
17047 \begin_inset space ~
17050 même si tout le monde ne les aime pas
17051 \begin_inset space ~
17054 – sont très utiles.
17058 \begin_layout Enumerate
17059 Line breaks after unspaced dashes can be allowed via the menu
17060 \begin_inset Newline newline
17065 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17066 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
17067 Optional line break
17073 \begin_layout Itemize
17074 Em-dashes without spaces—\SpecialChar allowbreak
17075 common in American English—\SpecialChar allowbreak
17076 should be followed by
17077 a line break opportunity.
17080 \begin_layout Standard
17081 This also allows hyphenation of the word following the dash (see section
17082 \begin_inset space ~
17086 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17088 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
17099 \begin_layout Enumerate
17100 With this setting, \SpecialChar LaTeX
17101 hyphenates words also if immediately followed by em
17102 or en dashes (see section
17103 \begin_inset space ~
17107 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17109 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
17119 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17120 Changes and backwards compatibility
17123 \begin_layout Standard
17124 Up to \SpecialChar LyX
17126 \begin_inset space ~
17129 2.1, consecutive hyphen characters (-- and ---) in the LyX source were merged
17130 to en or em dashes by LaTeX.
17132 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17136 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17139 retain the line-break properties of hyphens while literal dash characters
17140 are regarded by \SpecialChar LaTeX
17148 \begin_layout Standard
17149 Since \SpecialChar LyX
17151 \begin_inset space ~
17154 2.2, consecutive hyphens in the LyX source are exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
17156 prevents ligation to dashes.
17158 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17162 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17165 in documents from earlier versions are converted to literal dash characters
17170 font); typed in consecutive hyphens are merged to dash characters immediately
17171 after the input (unless the current text font is
17179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17180 The behavior was changed since
17181 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17185 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17189 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17193 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17196 in PDF, Postscript, and DVI output.
17197 An unintended consequence of these changes was that all dashes were output
17198 as non-breakable dashes.
17199 This also resulted in changed line breaks in some older documents.
17208 \begin_layout Standard
17211 \begin_inset space ~
17219 When opening documents edited with \SpecialChar LyX
17221 \begin_inset space ~
17224 2.2 or earlier and containing literal dash characters not followed by whitespace,
17227 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17228 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
17229 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
17230 Disallow line breaks after dashes
17232 is active to prevent changes to the line breaks.
17236 If you used both literal and
17237 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17241 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17244 dashes in pre-\SpecialChar LyX
17246 \begin_inset space ~
17249 2.2 documents, you may need to enable or prevent individual line breaks as
17250 shown above to restore the correct line breaking behavior.
17253 \begin_layout Subsection
17255 \begin_inset Index idx
17258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17265 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17267 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
17274 \begin_layout Standard
17275 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
17276 but automatically in the output.
17277 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17283 \begin_inset Index idx
17286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17293 following the rules of the document language.
17295 does not hyphenate text in the
17299 font and words immediately preceded or followed by hyphens or dashes.
17302 \begin_layout Standard
17304 hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
17308 font and with unusual constructs, like
17309 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17313 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17317 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
17318 cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points manually.
17319 This is done with the menu
17321 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17322 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
17324 \begin_inset space ~
17330 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
17332 If no hyphenation is necessary, \SpecialChar LaTeX
17336 \begin_layout Standard
17337 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
17338 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
17340 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17344 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17349 would then see the hyphen
17350 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17354 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17357 as a line break possibility.
17358 A line break at this point would look ugly.
17359 To prevent the shortcut from being broken, you can use a protected hyphen
17362 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17363 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
17366 ) or put it into a makebox as described in section
17368 Prevent Hyphenation
17373 \begin_inset space ~
17381 \begin_layout Subsection
17383 \begin_inset Index idx
17386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17395 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17396 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
17397 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17399 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
17406 \begin_layout Standard
17407 When \SpecialChar LyX
17408 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
17409 to generate the final version of your document, \SpecialChar LaTeX
17411 distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
17414 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17417 appropriate amount of space.
17418 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17421 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
17423 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
17424 gets after another word.
17427 \begin_layout Standard
17428 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
17429 not work in all cases.
17431 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17439 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17442 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
17443 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
17446 \begin_layout Standard
17447 Here are some examples of
17451 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
17454 \begin_layout Itemize
17459 \begin_layout Itemize
17464 \begin_layout Standard
17465 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
17468 \begin_layout Itemize
17470 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17474 this is too much space!
17477 \begin_layout Itemize
17482 \begin_layout Standard
17483 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
17486 \begin_layout Standard
17487 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
17490 \begin_layout Enumerate
17494 \begin_inset space ~
17499 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
17500 \begin_inset space ~
17504 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17506 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
17511 \begin_inset Index idx
17514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17515 Spaces ! inter-word
17523 \begin_layout Enumerate
17527 \begin_inset space ~
17532 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
17533 \begin_inset space ~
17537 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17539 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
17544 \begin_inset Index idx
17547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17556 \begin_layout Enumerate
17560 \begin_inset space ~
17564 \begin_inset space ~
17568 \begin_inset space ~
17575 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17577 \begin_inset space ~
17582 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
17583 This function is also bound to
17586 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
17592 \begin_layout Standard
17593 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
17596 \begin_layout Itemize
17598 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17602 \begin_inset space \space{}
17605 this is too much space!
17608 \begin_layout Itemize
17609 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
17613 \begin_layout Standard
17614 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
17615 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
17617 will take care of this.
17620 \begin_layout Standard
17621 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
17625 \begin_inset space ~
17631 feature described in the section
17633 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
17638 Additional Features
17643 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17645 \begin_inset Index idx
17648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17649 Typography ! Quotation marks
17655 \begin_inset Index idx
17658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17659 Quotation marks | see
17663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17689 \begin_layout Standard
17691 usually sets quotation marks correctly.
17692 Specifically, it will insert an opening mark at the beginning of quoted
17693 text, and use a closing mark at the end.
17695 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17699 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17703 The keyboard character,
17707 , generates this automatically.
17710 \begin_layout Standard
17711 You can specify what character the
17715 key produces by using the submenu
17721 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17725 \begin_inset Index idx
17728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17729 Document ! Settings
17734 dialog and switching the
17738 (note that \SpecialChar LyX
17739 makes a sensible proposal for the selected main language).
17741 \begin_inset space ~
17747 \begin_layout Labeling
17748 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17752 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17756 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17760 \begin_inset space ~
17764 \begin_inset space ~
17768 \begin_inset Quotes els
17772 \begin_inset Quotes ers
17778 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17782 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17786 \begin_inset Quotes els
17790 \begin_inset Quotes ers
17793 quotation marks (as common, e.
17794 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17800 \begin_layout Labeling
17801 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17804 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17808 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17812 \begin_inset space ~
17816 \begin_inset space ~
17820 \begin_inset Quotes sls
17824 \begin_inset Quotes srs
17830 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17834 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17838 \begin_inset Quotes sls
17842 \begin_inset Quotes srs
17845 quotation marks (as common, e.
17846 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17852 \begin_layout Labeling
17853 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17856 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17860 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17864 \begin_inset space ~
17868 \begin_inset space ~
17872 \begin_inset Quotes gls
17876 \begin_inset Quotes grs
17882 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17886 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17890 \begin_inset Quotes gls
17894 \begin_inset Quotes grs
17897 quotation marks (as common, e.
17898 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17904 \begin_layout Labeling
17905 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17908 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17912 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17916 \begin_inset space ~
17920 \begin_inset space ~
17924 \begin_inset Quotes pls
17928 \begin_inset Quotes prs
17934 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17938 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17942 \begin_inset Quotes pls
17946 \begin_inset Quotes prs
17949 quotation marks (as common, e.
17950 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17956 \begin_layout Labeling
17957 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17960 \begin_inset Quotes cld
17964 \begin_inset Quotes crd
17968 \begin_inset space ~
17972 \begin_inset space ~
17976 \begin_inset Quotes cls
17980 \begin_inset Quotes crs
17986 \begin_inset Quotes cld
17990 \begin_inset Quotes crd
17994 \begin_inset Quotes cls
17998 \begin_inset Quotes crs
18001 quotation marks (as common, e.
18002 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18005 g., in Switzerland)
18008 \begin_layout Labeling
18009 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18012 \begin_inset Quotes ald
18016 \begin_inset Quotes ard
18020 \begin_inset space ~
18024 \begin_inset space ~
18028 \begin_inset Quotes als
18032 \begin_inset Quotes ars
18038 \begin_inset Quotes ald
18042 \begin_inset Quotes ard
18046 \begin_inset Quotes als
18050 \begin_inset Quotes ars
18053 quotation marks (as common, e.
18054 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18060 \begin_layout Labeling
18061 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18064 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
18068 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
18072 \begin_inset space ~
18076 \begin_inset space ~
18080 \begin_inset Quotes qls
18084 \begin_inset Quotes qls
18090 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
18094 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
18098 \begin_inset Quotes qls
18102 \begin_inset Quotes qls
18105 quotation marks (so-called plain or non-typographical quotation marks)
18108 \begin_layout Labeling
18109 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18112 \begin_inset Quotes bld
18116 \begin_inset Quotes brd
18120 \begin_inset space ~
18124 \begin_inset space ~
18128 \begin_inset Quotes bls
18132 \begin_inset Quotes brs
18138 \begin_inset Quotes bld
18142 \begin_inset Quotes brd
18146 \begin_inset Quotes bls
18150 \begin_inset Quotes brs
18153 quotation marks (as common, e.
18154 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18157 g., in Great Britain)
18160 \begin_layout Labeling
18161 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18164 \begin_inset Quotes fld
18168 \begin_inset Quotes frd
18172 \begin_inset space ~
18176 \begin_inset space ~
18180 \begin_inset Quotes fls
18184 \begin_inset Quotes frs
18190 \begin_inset Quotes fld
18194 \begin_inset Quotes frd
18198 \begin_inset Quotes fls
18202 \begin_inset Quotes frs
18205 quotation marks (as common, e.
18206 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18212 \begin_layout Labeling
18213 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18216 \begin_inset Quotes ild
18220 \begin_inset Quotes ird
18224 \begin_inset space ~
18228 \begin_inset space ~
18232 \begin_inset Quotes ils
18236 \begin_inset Quotes irs
18242 \begin_inset Quotes ild
18246 \begin_inset Quotes ird
18250 \begin_inset Quotes ils
18254 \begin_inset Quotes irs
18257 quotation marks (another style common in France)
18261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18262 Maybe you wonder why one does not simply use only outer marks in this case,
18263 since these look identical to the inner marks.
18264 The answer is that you cannot easily switch to another style then (where
18265 the inner marks differ).
18273 \begin_layout Labeling
18274 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18277 \begin_inset Quotes rld
18281 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
18285 \begin_inset space ~
18289 \begin_inset space ~
18293 \begin_inset Quotes rls
18297 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
18303 \begin_inset Quotes rld
18307 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
18311 \begin_inset Quotes rls
18315 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
18318 quotation marks (as common, e.
18319 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18325 \begin_layout Labeling
18326 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18329 \begin_inset Quotes wld
18333 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
18337 \begin_inset space ~
18341 \begin_inset space ~
18345 \begin_inset Quotes wls
18349 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
18355 \begin_inset Quotes wld
18359 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
18363 \begin_inset Quotes wls
18367 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
18370 quotation marks (another style common in Sweden)
18373 \begin_layout Labeling
18374 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18375 \begin_inset Quotes jld
18383 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
18389 \begin_inset space ~
18393 \begin_inset space ~
18399 \begin_inset Quotes jls
18407 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
18411 \begin_inset Quotes jld
18415 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
18419 \begin_inset Quotes jls
18423 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
18426 quotation marks (as common, e.
18427 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18435 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
18436 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
18444 \begin_layout Labeling
18445 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18446 \begin_inset Quotes kld
18454 \begin_inset Quotes krd
18460 \begin_inset space ~
18464 \begin_inset space ~
18470 \begin_inset Quotes kls
18478 \begin_inset Quotes krs
18482 \begin_inset Quotes kld
18486 \begin_inset Quotes krd
18490 \begin_inset Quotes kls
18494 \begin_inset Quotes krs
18497 quotation marks (as common, e.
18498 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18501 g., in North Korea and China)
18505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18506 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
18507 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
18515 \begin_layout Standard
18516 Inner quotation marks
18520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18521 In many writing cultures, these are single quotation marks.
18522 But as the British and French styles show, this is not necessarily the
18523 case (and specifically the British style shows that
18524 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18528 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18531 does not necessarily mean
18532 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18536 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18540 This is why we call them
18541 \begin_inset Quotes els
18545 \begin_inset Quotes ers
18549 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18553 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18561 for quotations inside quotations (and other tasks in some languages, such
18563 \begin_inset Quotes els
18567 \begin_inset Quotes ers
18570 ) can be obtained by means of the shortcut
18573 arg "quote-insert inner"
18578 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18584 \begin_layout Standard
18585 By default, the quotation mark styles are persistent.
18586 That is to say, a quotation mark maintains the style that was current when
18587 it was inserted, even if the document-wide style changes.
18588 This allows you to enter marks of different style.
18589 If you check the setting
18591 Use dynamic quotation marks
18595 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18596 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18599 , however, special quotation marks will be inserted (in the LyX window,
18600 they appear in a special color).
18601 These marks will automatically adapt to the main style (and its changes).
18602 Such quotation marks make it easy to alter the quotation mark style in
18604 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18607 g., if your publisher requests a different style).
18610 \begin_layout Standard
18611 Individual quotation marks (i.
18612 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18615 e., their level [inner, outer], side [opening, closing], and style) can be
18616 easily switched by a context menu that pops up if you right-click on a
18620 \begin_layout Subsection
18622 \begin_inset Index idx
18625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18626 Typography ! Ligatures
18632 \begin_inset Index idx
18635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18664 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18666 name "subsec:Ligatures"
18673 \begin_layout Standard
18674 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
18675 print them as single characters.
18676 These groups are known as
18681 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
18682 knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too in the
18684 Here are the standard ligatures:
18687 \begin_layout Itemize
18691 \begin_layout Itemize
18695 \begin_layout Itemize
18699 \begin_layout Itemize
18703 \begin_layout Itemize
18707 \begin_layout Standard
18708 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
18711 \begin_layout Standard
18712 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
18713 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
18714 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18718 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18721 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
18722 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18726 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18730 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18734 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18737 To break a ligature, use
18739 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18740 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18742 \begin_inset space ~
18749 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18753 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18757 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18760 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
18762 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18766 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18770 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18774 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18777 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
18779 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18785 \begin_layout Subsection
18787 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
18789 \begin_inset Index idx
18792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18802 \begin_layout Standard
18805 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18806 Special Characters\SpecialChar menuseparator
18810 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
18813 \begin_layout Description
18815 The name of the game.
18818 \begin_layout Description
18820 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
18824 \begin_layout Description
18826 The \SpecialChar TeX
18827 macro collection used by \SpecialChar LyX
18831 \begin_layout Description
18832 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
18833 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
18837 \begin_layout Standard
18838 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18840 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18844 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
18848 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18852 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
18853 world to give programs geek version numbers.
18854 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
18855 converges to the number
18856 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
18859 : The actual version is
18860 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18865 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18868 , the previous one was
18869 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18874 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18880 \begin_layout Subsection
18882 \begin_inset Index idx
18885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18894 \begin_layout Standard
18895 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
18896 space between two words.
18897 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
18900 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18904 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18907 for units use the menu
18909 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18910 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18912 \begin_inset space ~
18920 arg "space-insert thin"
18926 \begin_layout Standard
18927 Here is an example to show the differences:
18930 \begin_layout Standard
18931 \begin_inset Tabular
18932 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
18933 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
18934 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
18935 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
18937 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18942 \begin_inset space ~
18946 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
18954 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18958 space between number and unit
18965 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18970 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18974 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
18982 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18986 half space between number and unit
18999 \begin_layout Subsection
19001 \begin_inset Index idx
19004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19005 Typography ! Widows and orphans
19013 \begin_layout Standard
19014 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
19016 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
19017 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
19018 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
19019 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
19020 These bits of text became known as
19031 \begin_layout Standard
19032 Clearly, \SpecialChar LyX
19033 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
19034 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
19035 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
19036 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
19037 built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
19038 governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there specifical
19039 ly to prevent widows and orphans.
19040 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
19041 \begin_inset Newline newline
19049 \begin_inset Newline newline
19057 \begin_inset Newline newline
19060 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
19061 preamble of your document to avoid them.
19062 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
19064 \begin_inset space ~
19068 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
19070 key "latexcompanion"
19076 \begin_inset space ~
19080 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
19087 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
19088 's page break mechanism.
19091 \begin_layout Chapter
19092 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
19093 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19095 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
19102 \begin_layout Standard
19103 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
19106 \begin_inset space ~
19112 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
19115 \begin_layout Section
19117 \begin_inset Index idx
19120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19127 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19136 \begin_layout Standard
19138 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
19141 \begin_layout Description
19144 \begin_inset space ~
19147 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
19148 \begin_inset Newline newline
19152 \begin_inset Note Note
19155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19156 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
19164 \begin_layout Description
19165 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
19166 a \SpecialChar LaTeX
19167 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
19170 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
19171 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
19173 \begin_inset space ~
19179 \begin_inset Newline newline
19183 \begin_inset Note Comment
19186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19187 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
19196 \begin_layout Description
19198 \begin_inset space ~
19201 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
19202 set in the document settings under
19204 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
19206 \begin_inset space ~
19212 \begin_inset Newline newline
19216 \begin_inset Newline newline
19220 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
19223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19229 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
19230 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
19235 of a comment that appears in the output.
19241 \begin_inset Newline newline
19245 \begin_inset Newline newline
19248 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
19251 \begin_layout Standard
19252 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
19260 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19264 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
19267 \begin_layout Section
19269 \begin_inset Index idx
19272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19279 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19281 name "sec:Footnotes"
19288 \begin_layout Standard
19290 uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the menu
19293 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19296 or the toolbar button
19299 arg "footnote-insert"
19311 \begin_inset Graphics
19312 filename clipart/footnote.png
19321 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
19322 's representation of your footnote.
19332 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19340 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19351 label, the box will
19355 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
19356 Clicking on the box label again will close
19369 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
19370 and click on the footnote
19385 \begin_layout Standard
19386 Here is an example footnote:
19394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19395 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
19403 \begin_layout Standard
19404 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
19405 position where the footnote box is placed.
19406 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
19407 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
19408 according to the document class.
19410 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get other
19411 schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
19417 ey are described in the
19420 \begin_inset space ~
19428 \begin_layout Section
19430 \begin_inset Index idx
19433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19440 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19442 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
19449 \begin_layout Standard
19450 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
19452 When you insert a margin note via the menu
19454 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19456 \begin_inset space ~
19461 or the toolbar button
19464 arg "marginalnote-insert"
19483 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19487 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19490 appearing within your text.
19491 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
19492 's representation of your margin
19501 \begin_layout Standard
19502 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
19506 \begin_inset Marginal
19509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19511 This is a marginal note.
19519 \begin_layout Standard
19520 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
19521 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
19522 pages, right on odd pages.
19525 \begin_layout Standard
19526 For further information about marginal notes see the section
19529 \begin_inset space ~
19537 \begin_inset space ~
19545 \begin_layout Section
19546 Graphics and Images
19547 \begin_inset Index idx
19550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19557 \begin_inset Index idx
19560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19567 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19569 name "sec:Graphics"
19576 \begin_layout Standard
19577 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
19578 you want and click on the toolbar icon
19581 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
19586 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19590 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
19593 \begin_layout Standard
19594 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
19599 tab allows you to choose your image file.
19600 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
19602 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
19603 \begin_inset space ~
19607 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19609 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
19616 \begin_layout Standard
19621 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
19622 of the image in the output.
19623 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
19627 \begin_inset space ~
19631 \begin_inset space ~
19640 \begin_inset space ~
19644 \begin_inset space ~
19648 \begin_inset space ~
19653 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
19654 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
19662 \begin_layout Standard
19666 \begin_inset space ~
19670 \begin_inset space ~
19675 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
19676 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
19678 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
19683 \begin_inset space ~
19688 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
19689 with the image size is printed.
19692 \begin_layout Standard
19693 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
19694 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
19696 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
19699 \begin_layout Standard
19701 \begin_inset Graphics
19702 filename clipart/2D-intensity-plot.pdf
19710 \begin_layout Standard
19711 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
19712 the image into a float, see section
19713 \begin_inset space ~
19717 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19719 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
19726 \begin_layout Subsection
19728 \begin_inset Index idx
19731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19738 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19740 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
19747 \begin_layout Standard
19748 You can insert images in any known file format.
19749 But as we explained in section
19750 \begin_inset space ~
19754 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19756 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
19760 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
19762 therefore uses the program
19766 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
19767 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
19768 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
19769 \begin_inset space ~
19773 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19775 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
19782 \begin_layout Standard
19783 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
19786 \begin_layout Description
19788 \begin_inset space ~
19791 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
19792 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
19793 Well-known bitmap image formats are
19794 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19797 Graphics Interchange Format
19798 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19801 (GIF, file extension
19802 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19810 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19814 \begin_inset Index idx
19817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19846 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19849 Portable Network Graphics
19850 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19853 (PNG, file extension
19854 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19862 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19866 \begin_inset Index idx
19869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19898 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19901 Joint Photographic Experts Group
19902 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19905 (JPG, file extension
19906 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19914 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19918 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19926 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19930 \begin_inset Index idx
19933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19964 \begin_layout Description
19966 \begin_inset space ~
19969 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
19971 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
19972 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
19973 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
19974 \begin_inset Newline newline
19977 Scalable image formats can be
19978 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19981 Scalable Vector Graphics
19982 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19985 (SVG, file extension
19986 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19994 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19998 \begin_inset Index idx
20001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20030 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20033 Encapsulated PostScript
20034 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20037 (EPS, file extension
20038 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20046 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20050 \begin_inset Index idx
20053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20082 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20085 Portable Document Format
20086 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20089 (PDF, file extension
20090 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20098 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20102 \begin_inset Index idx
20105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20113 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20117 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20120 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
20121 result will not be scalable.
20122 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
20127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20128 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
20136 \begin_layout Standard
20137 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
20144 \begin_layout Subsection
20145 Grouping of Image Settings
20146 \begin_inset Index idx
20149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20150 Images ! Settings grouping
20158 \begin_layout Standard
20159 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
20161 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
20162 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
20164 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
20165 need to manually change each of them.
20169 \begin_layout Standard
20170 A new group can be set by pressing the button
20173 \begin_inset space ~
20177 \begin_inset space ~
20189 \begin_inset space ~
20193 \begin_inset space ~
20199 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
20200 and checking the name of the desired group.
20202 \change_inserted 5863208 1518729806
20203 If there are too many images which need to be assigned to a single group
20204 you can simply put all of them into single selection and choose
20207 \begin_inset space ~
20211 \begin_inset space ~
20221 \begin_layout Section
20223 \begin_inset Index idx
20226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20233 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20242 \begin_layout Standard
20243 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
20246 arg "tabular-insert"
20251 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20255 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns.
20256 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
20257 from the rest of the table.
20258 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
20259 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
20261 Here is an example table:
20264 \begin_layout Standard
20266 \begin_inset Tabular
20267 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
20268 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
20269 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20270 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20271 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
20272 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20274 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20283 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20301 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20310 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20321 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20339 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20348 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20357 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20368 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20386 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20395 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20408 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20419 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20437 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20446 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20455 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20472 \begin_layout Subsection
20476 \begin_layout Standard
20477 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
20480 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
20484 This brings up the table dialog.
20485 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
20486 cursor is placed currently.
20487 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
20488 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
20489 done on all of your selection.
20492 \begin_layout Standard
20493 In addition to the table dialog, the
20496 \begin_inset space ~
20501 helps you in setting table properties.
20502 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
20505 \begin_layout Standard
20509 \begin_inset space ~
20514 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
20515 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
20516 current cell respectively.
20517 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
20519 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
20520 of text, see section
20521 \begin_inset space ~
20525 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20527 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
20534 \begin_layout Standard
20535 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
20536 using the check box
20545 This will merge the cells to
20549 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
20550 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
20551 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
20552 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
20553 in the last row without the upper border:
20556 \begin_layout Standard
20558 \begin_inset Tabular
20559 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
20560 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
20561 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20562 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
20563 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
20564 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20566 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20575 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20584 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20593 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20604 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20622 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20631 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20640 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20651 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20660 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20669 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20678 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20695 \begin_layout Standard
20696 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
20697 -arguments for the table.
20698 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
20699 explained in the chapter
20706 \begin_inset space ~
20712 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
20713 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
20714 but are visible in the output.
20717 \begin_layout Standard
20718 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
20721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20726 Most DVI-viewers are
20730 able to display rotations.
20738 \begin_layout Standard
20743 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
20748 adds lines for all cell borders.
20751 \begin_layout Subsection
20753 \begin_inset Index idx
20756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20757 Tables ! Multi-page
20763 \begin_inset Index idx
20766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20775 \begin_layout Standard
20776 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
20779 \begin_inset space ~
20783 \begin_inset space ~
20791 \begin_inset space ~
20796 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
20797 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
20800 \begin_layout Description
20805 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
20806 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
20807 Except for the first page, if
20810 \begin_inset space ~
20818 \begin_layout Description
20822 \begin_inset space ~
20827 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
20828 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
20831 \begin_layout Description
20836 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
20837 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
20838 except for the last page, if
20841 \begin_inset space ~
20849 \begin_layout Description
20853 \begin_inset space ~
20858 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
20859 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
20862 \begin_layout Description
20863 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
20864 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
20866 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20870 More about multi-page table captions can be found in the
20873 \begin_inset space ~
20881 \begin_layout Standard
20882 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
20883 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
20884 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
20890 In this context, first means first in this order:
20893 \begin_inset space ~
20905 \begin_inset space ~
20910 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
20913 \begin_layout Standard
20915 \begin_inset Tabular
20916 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
20917 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
20918 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
20919 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20920 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20921 <row endfirsthead="true">
20922 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20928 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
20933 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20942 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20952 <row endfirsthead="true">
20953 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20964 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20973 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20985 <row endhead="true">
20986 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20997 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21006 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21016 <row endhead="true">
21017 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21028 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21037 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21049 <row endfoot="true">
21050 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21061 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21070 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21081 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21092 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21101 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21112 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21123 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21132 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21143 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21154 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21163 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21174 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21185 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21194 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21205 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21216 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21225 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21236 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21247 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21256 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21267 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21278 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21287 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21298 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21309 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21318 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21329 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21340 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21349 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21360 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21371 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21380 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21391 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21402 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21411 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21422 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21433 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21442 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21453 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21464 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21473 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21484 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21495 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21504 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21515 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21526 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21535 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21546 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21557 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21566 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21577 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21588 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21597 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21608 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21619 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21628 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21639 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21650 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21659 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21670 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21681 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21690 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21701 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21712 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21721 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21732 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21743 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21752 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21763 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21774 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21783 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21794 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21805 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21814 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21825 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21836 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21845 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21856 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21867 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21876 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21887 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21898 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21907 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21918 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21929 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21938 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21949 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21960 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21969 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21980 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21991 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22000 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22011 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22022 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22031 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22042 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22051 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
22054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22060 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22071 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22082 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22091 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22102 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22113 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22122 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22133 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22144 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22153 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22164 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22175 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22184 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22195 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22206 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22215 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22226 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22237 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22246 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22257 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22268 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22277 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22288 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22299 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22308 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22319 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22330 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22339 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22350 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22361 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22370 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22381 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22392 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22401 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22412 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22423 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22432 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22443 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22454 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22463 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22474 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22485 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22494 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22505 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22516 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22525 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22536 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22547 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22556 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22567 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22578 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22587 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22598 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22609 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22618 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22629 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22640 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22649 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22660 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22671 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22680 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22691 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22702 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22711 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22722 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22733 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22742 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22753 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22764 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22773 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22784 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22795 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22804 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22815 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22826 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22835 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22846 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22857 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22866 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22877 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22888 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22897 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22908 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22919 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22928 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22939 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22950 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22959 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22970 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22981 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22990 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23001 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23012 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23021 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23031 <row endlastfoot="true">
23032 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23043 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
23046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23052 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23069 \begin_layout Subsection
23071 \begin_inset Index idx
23074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23081 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23083 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
23090 \begin_layout Standard
23091 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
23092 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
23093 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
23094 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
23098 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
23101 \begin_layout Standard
23102 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
23103 for the column in the table dialog.
23104 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
23105 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
23109 \begin_layout Standard
23111 \begin_inset Tabular
23112 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
23113 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
23114 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23115 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
23116 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23118 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23136 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23154 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23174 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23192 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23205 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
23210 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23230 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23248 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23261 This is longer now.
23266 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23286 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23304 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23317 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
23318 This is longer now.
23323 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23349 \begin_layout Standard
23350 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
23351 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
23355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23356 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
23357 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
23363 Selection with the mouse or with
23367 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
23368 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
23369 the selection from outside the table.
23372 \begin_layout Section
23374 \begin_inset Index idx
23377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23384 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23393 \begin_layout Subsection
23397 \begin_layout Standard
23398 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
23399 have a fixed location.
23401 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23405 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23408 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
23416 \begin_inset space ~
23421 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
23422 too many notes on the current page.
23425 \begin_layout Standard
23426 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
23427 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
23428 and pages without text.
23429 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
23430 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
23431 Floats are therefore numbered.
23432 Referencing is described in section
23433 \begin_inset space ~
23437 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23439 reference "sec:Cross-References"
23446 \begin_layout Standard
23447 To insert a float, use the menu
23449 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23453 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
23454 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
23456 After the label you can insert the caption text.
23457 \begin_inset Index idx
23460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23466 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
23467 paragraph within the float.
23468 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
23469 -document readable, you can open and close the float box by
23470 left-clicking on the box label.
23471 A closed float box looks like this:
23472 \begin_inset Graphics
23473 filename clipart/float.png
23478 – a gray button with a red label.
23481 \begin_layout Standard
23482 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
23484 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
23487 \begin_layout Subsection
23489 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23491 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
23496 \begin_inset Index idx
23499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23500 Floats ! Figure floats
23508 \begin_layout Standard
23510 \begin_inset space ~
23514 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23516 reference "fig:A-star-in"
23520 was created using the menu
23522 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23523 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
23529 arg "float-insert figure"
23533 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
23536 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23542 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
23546 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
23547 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
23549 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
23551 \begin_inset space ~
23559 arg "layout-paragraph"
23565 \begin_layout Standard
23566 \begin_inset Float figure
23571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23573 \begin_inset Graphics
23574 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
23583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23584 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23587 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23589 name "fig:A-star-in"
23606 \begin_layout Standard
23607 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
23608 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
23610 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23619 ) and refer to it using the menu
23621 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23627 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
23631 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
23632 vague references like
23633 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23637 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23640 , because, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
23641 will reposition the floats in the final document, it might
23643 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23647 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23651 For more about cross-references, see section
23652 \begin_inset space ~
23656 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23658 reference "sec:Cross-References"
23665 \begin_layout Standard
23666 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
23667 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
23668 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
23669 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
23670 as described in section
23671 \begin_inset space ~
23675 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23677 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
23683 \begin_inset space ~
23687 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23689 reference "fig:Two-images"
23693 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
23694 You can also set the images one below the other.
23696 \begin_inset space ~
23700 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23702 reference "fig:Undefinable"
23707 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23709 reference "fig:Star"
23713 are the subfigures.
23716 \begin_layout Standard
23717 \begin_inset Float figure
23722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23723 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23727 \begin_inset Float figure
23732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23733 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23736 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23738 name "fig:Undefinable"
23750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23751 \begin_inset Graphics
23752 filename clipart/3D-structure-distort.pdf
23764 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23768 \begin_inset Float figure
23773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23774 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23777 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23792 \begin_inset Graphics
23793 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
23805 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23812 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23815 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23817 name "fig:Two-images"
23834 \begin_layout Subsection
23836 \begin_inset Index idx
23839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23840 Floats ! Table floats
23848 \begin_layout Standard
23849 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
23851 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23852 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
23855 or the toolbar button
23858 arg "float-insert table"
23862 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
23863 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
23864 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
23866 \begin_inset space ~
23870 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23872 reference "tab:Table-float"
23879 \begin_layout Standard
23880 \begin_inset Float table
23885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23886 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23889 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23891 name "tab:Table-float"
23903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23905 \begin_inset Tabular
23906 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
23907 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
23908 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23909 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23910 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23912 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23930 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23948 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23968 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23986 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24004 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24024 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24037 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
24045 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24058 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
24061 \end{array}\right]$
24069 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24082 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
24103 \begin_layout Subsection
24105 \begin_inset Index idx
24108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24117 \begin_layout Standard
24119 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
24120 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
24121 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
24123 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
24131 \begin_inset space ~
24139 \begin_layout Section
24141 \begin_inset Index idx
24144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24153 \begin_layout Standard
24155 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page, called
24157 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
24158 \begin_inset space \space{}
24165 \begin_layout Standard
24166 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
24167 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
24169 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24173 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
24174 and its alignment within the page.
24177 \begin_layout Standard
24179 \begin_inset Box Frameless
24189 height_special "totalheight"
24194 backgroundcolor "none"
24197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24200 This is a minipage.
24201 The text is set in an italic style.
24204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24207 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
24208 another formatting.
24216 \begin_layout Standard
24217 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
24220 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
24224 as described in section
24225 \begin_inset space ~
24229 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24231 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
24236 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
24242 \begin_layout Standard
24243 \begin_inset Box Frameless
24253 height_special "totalheight"
24258 backgroundcolor "none"
24261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24262 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
24263 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
24269 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
24273 \begin_inset Box Frameless
24283 height_special "totalheight"
24288 backgroundcolor "none"
24291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24292 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
24293 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
24301 \begin_layout Standard
24302 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
24308 \begin_layout Standard
24309 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
24311 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
24318 \begin_inset space ~
24326 \begin_layout Chapter
24327 Mathematical Formulas
24328 \begin_inset Index idx
24331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24338 \begin_inset Index idx
24341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24370 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24372 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
24379 \begin_layout Standard
24380 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
24385 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
24388 \begin_layout Section
24390 \begin_inset Index idx
24393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24402 \begin_layout Standard
24403 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
24416 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
24418 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
24419 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
24420 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
24422 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24428 \begin_layout Standard
24429 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
24433 \begin_inset space ~
24438 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
24441 \begin_layout Standard
24442 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
24443 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
24446 \begin_layout Standard
24447 This is a line with an inline formula
24448 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
24454 \begin_layout Standard
24455 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
24456 paragraph, like this one:
24457 \begin_inset Formula
24464 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
24467 \begin_layout Standard
24469 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
24471 For example, typing
24472 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24482 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24485 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
24486 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
24490 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
24493 \begin_inset space ~
24501 \begin_layout Subsection
24502 Navigating in Formulas
24503 \begin_inset Index idx
24506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24515 \begin_layout Standard
24516 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
24517 achieved with the arrow keys.
24519 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
24520 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
24525 will leave a formula construct (a square root
24526 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
24530 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
24534 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
24537 \end{array}\right]$
24545 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
24550 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
24551 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
24554 \begin_layout Standard
24559 , printed in this document as
24560 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24564 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24568 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24571 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
24572 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
24573 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
24578 For example, if you want
24579 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
24587 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24597 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24601 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24606 , since in the latter case only the
24609 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
24614 will be under the square root sign:
24615 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
24621 \begin_layout Standard
24622 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
24624 \begin_inset Formula
24626 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
24635 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
24636 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
24639 \begin_layout Subsection
24643 \begin_layout Standard
24644 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
24645 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
24649 and a cursor movement key to select text.
24650 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
24651 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
24652 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
24653 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
24657 \begin_layout Subsection
24658 Exponents and Subscripts
24659 \begin_inset Index idx
24662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24669 \begin_inset Index idx
24672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24681 \begin_layout Standard
24682 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
24685 arg "math-superscript"
24691 arg "math-subscript"
24694 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
24696 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
24699 , type in a formula
24702 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24712 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
24718 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
24722 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
24728 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24734 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
24736 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24740 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24743 , you have to use an extra
24747 to separate the circumflex and the character.
24748 For example, if you want
24749 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
24755 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24761 Subscripts are similar: To get
24762 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
24768 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24776 \begin_layout Subsection
24778 \begin_inset Index idx
24781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24790 \begin_layout Standard
24791 Create a fraction either with the command
24797 or by using the icon
24800 arg "math-insert \\frac"
24806 \begin_inset space ~
24812 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
24813 The cursor is above the fraction line.
24814 To move it to the bottom, simply press
24819 To move back up, press
24824 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
24825 \begin_inset Formula
24827 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
24830 \end{array}\right)}\right]
24838 \begin_layout Subsection
24840 \begin_inset Index idx
24843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24852 \begin_layout Standard
24853 Roots can be created using the
24856 \begin_inset space ~
24864 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
24870 arg "math-insert \\root"
24892 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
24898 always produces a square root.
24901 \begin_layout Subsection
24902 Operators with Limits
24903 \begin_inset Index idx
24906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24913 \begin_inset Index idx
24916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24923 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24925 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
24932 \begin_layout Standard
24934 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
24938 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
24941 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
24942 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
24943 by entering them as you would enter a super-
24944 or subscript, directly after the symbol.
24945 The sum operator will automatically place its
24946 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24950 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24953 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
24955 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
24959 \begin_inset Formula
24961 \sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
24966 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
24970 \begin_layout Standard
24971 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
24973 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
24974 behind the operator and using the menu
24976 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24977 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
24979 \begin_inset space ~
24983 \begin_inset space ~
24997 \begin_layout Standard
24998 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
24999 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25003 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25007 \begin_inset Index idx
25010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25017 \begin_inset Formula
25019 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
25024 which will place the
25025 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
25029 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25033 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25037 In inline formulas it looks like this:
25038 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
25044 \begin_layout Standard
25045 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
25052 Have a look at section
25053 \begin_inset space ~
25057 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25059 reference "subsec:Functions"
25063 for an explanation of function macros.
25066 \begin_layout Subsection
25068 \begin_inset Index idx
25071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25080 \begin_layout Standard
25081 Most math symbols can be found in the
25084 \begin_inset space ~
25089 under one of several categories; including
25106 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
25110 \begin_layout Standard
25111 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
25112 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use, you
25113 don't have to use the
25116 \begin_inset space ~
25121 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
25123 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
25126 \begin_layout Subsection
25128 \begin_inset Index idx
25131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25140 \begin_layout Standard
25141 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
25147 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
25153 \begin_inset space ~
25161 arg "math-insert \\space"
25165 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
25166 For example, the sequence
25171 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
25174 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
25176 \begin_inset Graphics
25177 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
25182 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
25183 the space marker and enter space again several times.
25184 With every space enter the size will be changed.
25185 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
25186 , because they are negative
25188 Here are two examples:
25191 \begin_layout Standard
25201 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
25207 \begin_layout Standard
25217 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
25223 \begin_layout Subsection
25225 \begin_inset Index idx
25228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25235 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25237 name "subsec:Functions"
25244 \begin_layout Standard
25248 \begin_inset space ~
25253 contains under the button
25256 arg "math-insert \\functions"
25259 a number of function macros, such as
25260 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
25264 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
25272 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
25279 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
25280 avoid confusions, because
25281 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
25285 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
25291 \begin_layout Standard
25292 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
25294 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
25298 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
25304 \begin_layout Standard
25305 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
25306 are placed, as described in section
25307 \begin_inset space ~
25311 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25313 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
25320 \begin_layout Subsection
25322 \begin_inset Index idx
25325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25334 \begin_layout Standard
25335 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
25337 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
25338 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
25339 commands, for example, to enter
25340 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
25343 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
25344 Our example is entered by typing
25349 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25356 \begin_inset space ~
25360 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25362 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
25366 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
25369 \begin_layout Standard
25370 \begin_inset Float table
25375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25376 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25379 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25381 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
25385 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
25393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25395 \begin_inset Tabular
25396 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
25397 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
25398 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25399 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25400 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25402 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25411 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25420 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25440 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25458 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25471 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25484 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
25494 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25512 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25525 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25538 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
25548 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25566 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25579 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25592 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
25602 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25620 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25633 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25646 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
25656 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25674 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25687 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25700 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
25710 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25728 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25741 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25754 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
25764 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25782 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25795 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25808 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
25818 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25836 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25849 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25862 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
25872 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25890 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25903 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25916 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
25926 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25935 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25948 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25961 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
25982 \begin_layout Standard
25983 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
25986 \begin_inset space ~
25994 arg "math-insert \\hat"
25997 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
26001 \begin_layout Section
26002 Brackets and Delimiters
26003 \begin_inset Index idx
26006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26013 \begin_inset Index idx
26016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26023 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26025 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
26032 \begin_layout Standard
26033 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
26035 For some purposes, using just the keys
26040 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
26041 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
26042 toolbar delimiter icon
26045 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
26049 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
26050 \begin_inset Formula
26052 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
26060 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
26061 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
26065 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
26068 and the expression on the right was entered using the
26074 \begin_inset Formula
26076 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
26084 \begin_layout Standard
26085 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
26086 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
26090 \begin_layout Standard
26091 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
26092 left side and right side.
26093 If you use the option
26096 \begin_inset space ~
26101 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
26102 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
26104 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
26109 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
26110 with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
26113 \begin_layout Standard
26114 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
26115 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
26116 is to go inside the brackets.
26117 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
26122 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
26123 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
26124 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
26128 arg "math-delim ( )"
26134 \begin_layout Section
26135 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
26136 \begin_inset Index idx
26139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26146 \begin_inset Index idx
26149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26156 \begin_inset Index idx
26159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26160 Math ! Multi-line Equations
26168 \begin_layout Standard
26169 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
26173 \begin_inset space ~
26181 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
26185 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
26186 Here is an example:
26187 \begin_inset Formula
26189 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
26198 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
26199 \begin_inset space ~
26203 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26205 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
26210 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
26211 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
26212 This alignment is set in the box
26217 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26225 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26229 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26237 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26241 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26249 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26255 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26263 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26266 for every column as default.
26267 For example, the sequence
26268 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26276 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26279 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
26280 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
26281 corresponds to the relevant column.
26282 The result will look like this:
26283 \begin_inset Formula
26286 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
26287 column & has & has\,right\\
26288 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
26297 \begin_layout Standard
26298 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
26301 arg "newline-insert newline"
26304 while the cursor is in the matrix.
26305 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
26307 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26310 or the math toolbar.
26313 \begin_layout Standard
26314 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
26315 It can be created with the menu
26317 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26318 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26320 \begin_inset space ~
26332 Here is an example:
26333 \begin_inset Formula
26347 \begin_layout Standard
26348 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
26351 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
26354 arg "newline-insert newline"
26358 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
26363 arg "newline-insert newline"
26366 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
26367 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26371 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26374 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
26375 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
26376 A new row is created by every further entry of
26379 arg "newline-insert newline"
26383 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
26384 Here is an example:
26385 \begin_inset Formula
26387 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
26388 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
26393 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
26394 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
26395 \begin_inset Formula
26397 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
26405 \begin_layout Standard
26406 The multi-line formula type described here is called
26413 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
26414 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
26415 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26417 reference "eq:asquared"
26422 The other types are described in section
26423 \begin_inset space ~
26427 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26429 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
26436 \begin_layout Section
26437 Formula Numbering and Referencing
26438 \begin_inset Index idx
26441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26442 Math ! Formula numbering
26448 \begin_inset Index idx
26451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26452 Math ! Referencing formulas
26458 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26460 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
26467 \begin_layout Standard
26468 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
26470 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26471 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26473 \begin_inset space ~
26477 \begin_inset space ~
26485 arg "math-number-toggle"
26489 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
26490 within parentheses.
26491 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
26492 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
26493 the document class.
26494 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
26495 separated by a dot:
26496 \begin_inset Formula
26506 arg "math-number-toggle"
26509 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
26510 You can only number displayed formulas.
26513 \begin_layout Standard
26514 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
26516 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26517 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26519 \begin_inset space ~
26523 \begin_inset space ~
26531 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
26534 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
26535 \begin_inset Formula
26538 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
26544 To number all lines use the shortcut
26547 arg "math-number-toggle"
26553 \begin_layout Standard
26554 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
26557 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
26558 A label is inserted with the menu
26560 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26569 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
26570 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
26571 It is recommended that you use the suggested
26572 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26580 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26583 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
26584 label type when you have many labels in your document.
26585 We inserted in the following example the label
26586 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26590 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26593 in the second line:
26594 \begin_inset Formula
26596 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
26597 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
26602 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
26603 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
26604 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
26606 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26608 \begin_inset space ~
26616 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
26620 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
26621 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
26622 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
26623 as the formula number:
26626 \begin_layout Standard
26627 This is a cross-reference to equation (
26628 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26630 reference "eq:tanhExp"
26637 \begin_layout Standard
26638 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
26639 's cross-reference box are described in section
26640 \begin_inset space ~
26644 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26646 reference "sec:Cross-References"
26651 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
26659 \begin_layout Section
26660 User defined math macros
26661 \begin_inset Index idx
26664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26673 \begin_layout Standard
26675 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
26676 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
26677 Math macros are explained in section
26680 \begin_inset space ~
26692 \begin_layout Section
26696 \begin_layout Subsection
26698 \begin_inset Index idx
26701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26710 \begin_layout Standard
26711 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
26712 To set a font in a formula, use the
26715 \begin_inset space ~
26723 arg "math-insert \\font"
26726 , or enter its command, listed in table
26727 \begin_inset space ~
26731 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26733 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
26740 \begin_layout Standard
26741 \begin_inset Float table
26746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26747 \begin_inset Caption Standard
26749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26750 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26752 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
26756 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
26764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26766 \begin_inset Tabular
26767 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="9" columns="2">
26768 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
26769 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26770 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26772 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26781 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26792 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26802 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
26810 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26825 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26829 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
26837 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26852 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26856 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
26864 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26879 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26889 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
26897 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26912 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26916 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
26924 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26939 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26943 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
26951 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26966 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26977 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
26985 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27000 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27004 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
27012 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27038 \begin_layout Standard
27039 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
27042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27047 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
27063 \begin_layout Standard
27064 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
27065 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
27070 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
27071 space when you need a space in the box.
27072 Here is an example where
27073 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27077 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27084 denotes the set of numbers:
27085 \begin_inset Formula
27087 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
27095 \begin_layout Standard
27096 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
27097 You can, for example, put a character in
27106 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
27110 \begin_inset Newline newline
27113 So it is better not to use this feature.
27116 \begin_layout Standard
27117 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
27118 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
27122 \begin_inset Newline newline
27125 You can only print them emboldened using the command
27131 , which works like the other typeface commands:
27132 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
27138 \begin_layout Standard
27145 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
27148 \begin_layout Standard
27149 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
27151 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27152 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
27154 \begin_inset space ~
27162 \begin_layout Subsection
27164 \begin_inset Index idx
27167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27176 \begin_layout Standard
27177 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
27179 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
27183 \begin_inset space ~
27187 \begin_inset space ~
27195 \begin_inset space ~
27203 arg "math-insert \\font"
27207 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
27208 in black instead of blue.
27209 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
27210 Here is an example:
27211 \begin_inset Formula
27214 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
27215 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
27224 \begin_layout Subsection
27226 \begin_inset Index idx
27229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27238 \begin_layout Standard
27239 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
27240 automatically chosen in most situations.
27258 For most characters,
27266 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
27267 and certain other structures, are set larger in
27272 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
27273 situations, all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
27274 thinks are appropriate.
27275 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
27278 arg "math-insert \\style"
27282 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
27283 For example, you can set
27284 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
27287 , which is normally in
27296 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
27300 The four styles are used in the following example:
27303 \begin_layout Standard
27304 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
27308 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
27312 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
27316 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
27322 \begin_layout Standard
27323 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
27324 is set in a particular size with the menu
27326 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27328 \begin_inset space ~
27333 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
27334 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
27335 will be adjusted to correspond.
27336 As an example here is a formula in the font size
27337 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27341 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27347 \begin_layout Standard
27351 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
27357 \begin_layout Section
27358 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
27360 \begin_inset Index idx
27363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27370 \begin_inset Index idx
27373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27382 \begin_layout Standard
27384 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS)
27385 that are in common use.
27388 \begin_layout Subsection
27389 Enabling AMS-Support
27392 \begin_layout Standard
27393 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
27394 the document by selecting the checkbox
27397 \begin_inset space ~
27401 \begin_inset space ~
27405 \begin_inset space ~
27412 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27416 \begin_inset Index idx
27419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27420 Document ! Settings
27428 \begin_inset space ~
27434 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
27435 -errors in formulas,
27436 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
27439 \begin_layout Subsection
27441 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27443 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
27448 \begin_inset Index idx
27451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27452 Math ! Multi-line Equations
27460 \begin_layout Standard
27461 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
27462 provides a selection of different formula types.
27464 allows you to choose between
27485 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
27486 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27493 , for an explanation of these formula types.
27496 \begin_layout Chapter
27500 \begin_layout Section
27502 \begin_inset Index idx
27505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27512 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27514 name "sec:Cross-References"
27521 \begin_layout Standard
27522 One of \SpecialChar LyX
27523 's strengths is cross-references.
27524 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
27526 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
27527 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
27528 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
27531 \begin_layout Enumerate
27535 \begin_layout Enumerate
27536 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27538 name "enu:Second-item"
27545 \begin_layout Enumerate
27549 \begin_layout Standard
27550 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
27552 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27555 or by pressing the toolbar button
27562 A gray label box like this:
27563 \begin_inset Graphics
27564 filename clipart/label.png
27568 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
27570 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
27572 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27580 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27585 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27593 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27597 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27601 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27605 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
27606 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
27608 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27616 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27622 \begin_layout Standard
27623 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
27625 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27628 or the toolbar button
27631 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
27635 A gray cross-reference box like this:
27636 \begin_inset Graphics
27637 filename clipart/reference.png
27641 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
27643 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
27644 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27652 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27656 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
27660 \begin_layout Standard
27661 As an alternative to
27663 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27666 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
27671 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
27672 to the actual cursor position via the menu
27674 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27686 \begin_layout Standard
27687 Here is our cross-reference: Item
27688 \begin_inset space ~
27692 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27694 reference "enu:Second-item"
27701 \begin_layout Standard
27702 It is recommended to use a protected space
27706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27707 described in section
27708 \begin_inset space ~
27712 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27714 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
27723 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
27724 line breaks between them.
27727 \begin_layout Standard
27728 There are eight formats of cross-references:
27731 \begin_layout Description
27732 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
27733 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27735 reference "fig:Two-images"
27742 \begin_layout Description
27743 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
27744 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
27746 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27750 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27754 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27756 reference "eq:tanhExp"
27763 \begin_layout Description
27764 <page>: prints the page number: Page
27765 \begin_inset space ~
27769 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27770 LatexCommand pageref
27771 reference "fig:Two-images"
27778 \begin_layout Description
27780 \begin_inset space ~
27784 \begin_inset space ~
27787 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
27788 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27789 LatexCommand vpageref
27790 reference "fig:Two-images"
27795 \begin_inset Newline newline
27798 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
27799 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
27800 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
27801 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
27802 it prints “on the next page”.
27803 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
27806 \begin_layout Description
27808 \begin_inset space ~
27812 \begin_inset space ~
27816 \begin_inset space ~
27819 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
27820 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27822 reference "fig:Two-images"
27827 \begin_inset Newline newline
27830 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
27836 ; otherwise it behaves like
27840 \begin_inset space ~
27844 \begin_inset space ~
27853 \begin_layout Description
27855 \begin_inset space ~
27858 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
27859 \begin_inset Newline newline
27863 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
27866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27871 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27881 \begin_inset Index idx
27884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27886 packages ! prettyref
27892 \begin_inset Index idx
27895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27897 packages ! refstyle
27908 \begin_inset Newline newline
27911 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
27912 -package should be used for this feature by setting
27915 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
27919 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27920 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
27928 is the default and preferred because
27932 supports only English documents.
27933 The format is specified by using the command
27945 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27946 preamble of the document.
27947 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
27949 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27957 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27965 \begin_inset Newline newline
27972 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
27977 \begin_inset Newline newline
27988 predefines reference formats for all available types.
27989 This is especially true for the wide variety of mathematical `theorem'
27991 So if you want to make formatted references to, say, Propositions, then
27992 you will need to define the relevant format yourself.
27997 , you might do so as follows:
27998 \begin_inset Newline newline
28005 newrefformat{prop}{Proposition
28010 \begin_inset Newline newline
28013 For more information about defining formatted references, have a look at
28014 the package documentation
28015 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28017 key "prettyref,refstyle"
28023 \begin_inset Newline newline
28034 will be available with formatted references only if you are using the
28041 \begin_layout Description
28043 \begin_inset space ~
28046 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
28047 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28048 LatexCommand nameref
28049 reference "fig:Two-images"
28056 \begin_layout Description
28058 \begin_inset space ~
28061 only: prints only the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28062 label for the reference:
28063 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28064 LatexCommand labelonly
28065 reference "fig:Two-images"
28070 \begin_inset Newline newline
28073 This allows for customization, using \SpecialChar TeX
28074 Code, if you want to issue a command
28075 that \SpecialChar LyX
28081 , then you may want to use the
28084 \begin_inset space ~
28089 option, which will output only the part of the reference following the
28091 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28095 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28099 This is the form needed for e.
28100 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28104 \begin_inset space \space{}
28111 's range commands.The number and current page of the referenced document
28112 part in the output is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
28114 The varieties are adjusted in the field
28118 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
28122 \begin_layout Standard
28123 You can only use the style
28127 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
28131 is always possible.
28134 \begin_layout Standard
28135 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
28136 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
28138 Referencing formulas is explained in section
28139 \begin_inset space ~
28143 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28145 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
28152 \begin_layout Standard
28153 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
28157 \begin_inset space ~
28161 \begin_inset space ~
28166 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
28167 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
28170 \begin_inset space ~
28175 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
28176 You can also go back with the toolbar button
28179 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
28185 \begin_layout Standard
28186 You can change labels at any time.
28187 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
28188 do not need to think about this.
28191 \begin_layout Standard
28192 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
28194 in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead
28198 \begin_layout Standard
28199 References are described in detail in the section
28200 \begin_inset space ~
28210 \begin_inset space ~
28218 \begin_layout Section
28219 Table of Contents and other Listings
28220 \begin_inset Index idx
28223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28230 \begin_inset Index idx
28233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28234 Navigating ! Outline
28240 \begin_inset Index idx
28243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28250 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28259 \begin_layout Subsection
28261 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28263 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
28270 \begin_layout Standard
28271 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
28273 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28274 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
28276 \begin_inset space ~
28280 \begin_inset space ~
28286 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
28288 If you click on it, the
28292 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
28293 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
28294 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
28296 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
28298 \begin_inset space ~
28303 that is described in section
28304 \begin_inset space ~
28308 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28310 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
28317 \begin_layout Standard
28318 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
28319 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
28321 \begin_inset space ~
28325 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28327 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
28331 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
28333 \begin_inset space ~
28337 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28339 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
28343 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
28345 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
28348 \begin_layout Subsection
28349 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
28350 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28352 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
28359 \begin_layout Standard
28360 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
28362 You can insert them via the
28364 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28368 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
28371 \begin_layout Section
28372 URLs and Hyperlinks
28373 \begin_inset Index idx
28376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28383 \begin_inset Index idx
28386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28395 \begin_layout Subsection
28397 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28406 \begin_layout Standard
28407 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
28409 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28415 \begin_layout Standard
28416 Here is an example URL: \SpecialChar LyX
28418 \begin_inset Flex URL
28421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28423 https://www.lyx.org
28431 \begin_layout Standard
28432 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
28438 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
28442 \begin_layout Standard
28443 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28451 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
28460 \begin_layout Subsection
28462 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28464 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
28471 \begin_layout Standard
28472 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
28474 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28477 or with the toolbar button
28484 The appearing dialog has two fields:
28493 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
28494 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
28495 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28497 name "LyX's homepage"
28498 target "https://www.lyx.org"
28503 , an Email address like this:
28504 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28506 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
28507 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
28513 , or a link to a file.
28518 in the hyperlink settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
28526 \begin_layout Standard
28527 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
28529 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28537 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28540 to the link target.
28543 \begin_layout Standard
28544 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
28545 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
28546 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
28547 the text style dialog.
28548 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
28552 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28554 name "LyX's homepage"
28555 target "https://www.lyx.org"
28563 \begin_layout Standard
28564 The link text color can be changed, when the option
28568 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
28570 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28571 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28575 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
28577 \begin_inset Newline newline
28585 \begin_inset Newline newline
28592 in the PDF Properties dialog.
28595 \begin_layout Section
28597 \begin_inset Index idx
28600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28607 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28609 name "sec:Appendices"
28616 \begin_layout Standard
28617 Appendices are created with the menu
28619 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28621 \begin_inset space ~
28625 \begin_inset space ~
28631 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
28632 as the appendix part of the book.
28633 This part is marked with a red borderline.
28636 \begin_layout Standard
28637 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
28638 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
28639 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
28640 and the subsection number.
28641 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
28645 \begin_layout Standard
28647 \begin_inset space ~
28651 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28653 reference "chap:Credits"
28658 \begin_inset space ~
28662 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28664 reference "subsec:Export"
28671 \begin_layout Section
28673 \begin_inset Index idx
28676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28683 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28685 name "sec:Bibliography"
28692 \begin_layout Standard
28693 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
28695 You can include a bibliography database, which is explained in sec.
28696 \begin_inset space ~
28700 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28702 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
28709 , or you can insert the bibliography manually, using the paragraph environment
28714 , which is described in the following section (but see also sec.
28715 \begin_inset space ~
28719 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28721 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
28726 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
28727 this document, such as author-year citations, and if you have more than
28728 a handful of references, then you should seriously consider
28732 using a bibliography database.
28735 \begin_layout Standard
28736 In order to demonstrate the difference between these two approaches, we
28737 use two bibliographies in this document, a
28741 environment and a database-generated bibliography.
28742 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
28743 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
28744 In other words, the database approach relieves you, amongst other things,
28745 from the burden to check which entries you have actually cited.
28748 \begin_layout Subsection
28749 The Bibliography Environment
28750 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28752 name "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
28759 \begin_layout Standard
28764 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
28766 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
28775 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
28777 Each entry needs to be given a unique key, which is one word consisting
28778 of ASCII characters only.
28782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28784 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28787 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set"
28793 \begin_inset Newline newline
28797 \begin_inset Flex URL
28800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28802 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII
28814 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
28817 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28821 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28824 , a short form of its title, as the key.
28825 \begin_inset Newline newline
28832 for the entry, references to it will appear with this label instead of
28833 the number of the entry.
28838 in the bibliography items settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
28847 \begin_layout Standard
28848 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
28850 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28853 or the toolbar button
28856 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
28860 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
28861 containing the available citations.
28862 Select one or more keys from the list and
28872 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
28873 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
28877 \begin_layout Standard
28878 Citation references appear in the output as the number or the label of the
28879 bibliography entry with surrounding brackets.
28880 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
28882 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28886 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28892 \begin_layout Standard
28896 Companion Second Edition
28899 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28901 key "latexcompanion"
28909 \begin_layout Standard
28910 The \SpecialChar LyX
28911 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
28912 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28922 \begin_layout Standard
28923 You can also produce author-year or author-number citations, using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28930 \begin_inset Index idx
28933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28941 In order to do so, the label needs to be given the form
28942 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28946 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28950 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28953 Author A and Author B(Year)
28954 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28961 a blank between the author(s) and the opening parenthesis that delimits
28963 Then, if you select
28966 \begin_inset space ~
28971 in the document settings
28972 \begin_inset Index idx
28975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28976 Document ! Settings
28983 Bibliography\SpecialChar menuseparator
28985 \begin_inset space ~
28991 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28993 reference "subsec:Citation-Format"
29000 ), you can select between different author-year or author-number styles.
29003 \begin_layout Standard
29004 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
29007 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
29009 \begin_inset space ~
29017 arg "layout-paragraph"
29021 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
29024 \begin_layout Subsection
29025 Bibliography databases
29026 \begin_inset Index idx
29029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29030 Bibliography ! Databases
29036 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29038 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
29045 \begin_layout Standard
29046 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same references in different
29051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29052 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
29054 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
29055 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
29060 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
29062 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
29063 your working field in a database.
29064 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
29065 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
29066 list for that document.
29067 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
29071 \begin_layout Standard
29072 The database is a text file with the file extension
29073 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29081 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29084 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
29085 The format is explained in
29086 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29093 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29095 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29097 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
29103 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
29104 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
29105 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
29107 \begin_inset Flex URL
29110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29112 https://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
29120 \begin_layout Standard
29122 supports two different approaches to use bibliography databases in a document.
29123 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29124 is the classic technique that has been the only way to use such databases
29126 It is quite established and mature and there is a huge range of existing
29128 But it has its drawbacks, especially when it comes to more complex bibliographi
29129 c needs and support for specific languages and scripts.
29130 Those are addressed by
29135 \begin_inset Index idx
29138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29140 packages ! biblatex
29146 It reads the same database format than Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29147 (although it has been significantly
29148 extended beyond Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29158 can handle any classic Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29159 database, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29160 might conversely fail to correctly
29161 handle databases that use specific
29170 , but it uses a different framework to generate citations and references
29174 \begin_layout Standard
29175 To select if Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29180 should be used, set in the document settings (menu
29182 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29186 \begin_inset Index idx
29189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29190 Document ! Settings
29202 \begin_inset space ~
29207 to a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29215 \begin_layout Subsubsection
29216 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29218 \begin_inset Index idx
29221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29222 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29231 \begin_layout Standard
29232 To access a database via Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29235 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29240 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
29242 \begin_inset space ~
29248 A window will appear in which you can add one or more databases and select
29249 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29257 Add bibliography to TOC
29259 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
29264 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
29265 in the document or just the cited references.
29268 \begin_layout Standard
29269 The Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29270 style file is a text file with the file extension
29271 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29279 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29282 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
29283 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
29284 distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
29285 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
29287 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
29292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29293 For information on how this is done, have a look at
29294 \begin_inset Newline newline
29298 \begin_inset CommandInset href
29300 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
29310 In this document we used the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29315 , which provides an alpha-numeric style in accordance with the German Standards
29319 \begin_layout Standard
29320 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
29323 \begin_layout Subsubsection
29325 \begin_inset Index idx
29328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29329 Bibliography ! Biblatex
29335 \begin_inset Index idx
29338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29340 packages ! biblatex
29348 \begin_layout Standard
29349 Accessing a database via
29353 is almost identical to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29356 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29361 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
29363 \begin_inset space ~
29369 In contrary to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29370 you cannot select a
29375 The other dialog options are the same as with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29379 \begin_layout Standard
29384 has two different style files: a bibliography style file (text file with
29386 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29394 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29397 ) controls how the bibliography entries will look like and a citation style
29398 file (text file with the file extension
29399 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29407 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29410 ) controls the look of the citation references in the text.
29411 Usually such style files come in pairs and it makes sense to use matching
29413 It is nevertheless possible to mix any citation style with any bibliography
29417 \begin_layout Standard
29422 styles are not set in the
29425 \begin_inset space ~
29430 dialog, but in the document settings.
29431 \begin_inset Index idx
29434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29435 Document ! Settings
29440 However, in the dialog in the
29444 field, which is only visible if you use
29448 , you can enter options that determine how the bibliography is printed (for
29449 example how its heading will appear).
29450 These options are described in detail in the
29455 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29465 \begin_layout Standard
29466 Inserting a citation reference works as described in section
29467 \begin_inset space ~
29471 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29473 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
29483 \begin_layout Subsubsection
29484 Bibliography Processors
29487 \begin_layout Standard
29488 To generate the bibliography from a database, \SpecialChar LyX
29489 uses a bibliography processor,
29490 that is an external program that reads the database, sorts the citations
29491 and processes the data in a way it can be included in the document.
29492 The classic program is called Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29494 It has the advantage that it is very mature and widespread, but the disadvantag
29495 e that it has severe limitations, due to its age.
29498 \begin_layout Standard
29499 Meanwhile, some alternatives have been developed that address some of these
29501 LyX natively supports some of them and lets you select a custom processor.
29502 You can do this on a general level in
29504 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
29505 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
29506 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
29509 or for individual documents in
29511 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29512 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29516 The following variants are available by default:
29519 \begin_layout Description
29520 biber a specific, modern processor
29521 \begin_inset Index idx
29524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29531 developed exclusively for
29535 (it does not work with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29541 provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory and many specific features
29546 makes use of; if you use the
29550 approach, it is strongly recommended to use
29557 \begin_layout Description
29558 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
29559 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
29560 with all bibliography packages, although it will probably fail with
29564 bibliographies due to the limited memory.
29567 \begin_layout Description
29568 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding
29569 (but no Unicode support), larger memory than
29573 , works with all bibliography packages, although more complex
29577 bibliographies will exceed its limits, and not all
29581 features are supported.
29584 \begin_layout Standard
29585 By default (with the
29591 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29592 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29605 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
29606 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
29607 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
29610 ), \SpecialChar LyX
29611 selects an appropriate (available) processor for the current bibliography
29624 for Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29625 -based bibliography styles).
29626 This should suit most needs.
29629 \begin_layout Standard
29630 In Japanese documents, a specific processor is used.
29631 By default this is pBib\SpecialChar TeX
29632 (in \SpecialChar LyX
29637 ), a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29638 variant specifically aimed at Japanese.
29639 You can adjust it in
29641 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
29642 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
29643 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
29649 \begin_layout Standard
29650 Selected bibliography processors can be controlled with options that you
29651 can add below the selection.
29652 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
29653 of Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29659 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29669 \begin_layout Subsubsection
29673 \begin_layout Standard
29675 supports some specific tasks such as sectioned bibliographies and multiple
29677 These are explained in detail in section
29679 Customizing Bibliographies
29683 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29688 Additional Features
29693 \begin_layout Subsection
29695 \begin_inset Index idx
29698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29699 Bibliography ! Citation format
29705 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29707 name "subsec:Citation-Format"
29714 \begin_layout Standard
29715 Many different citation formats are common, e.
29716 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29720 \begin_inset space \space{}
29723 numerical citation (as
29724 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29728 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29731 like in this document), alpha-numerical citations (as
29732 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29736 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29739 ) or author-year citations (as
29740 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29744 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29749 supports these formats via specific citation packages and their style
29753 \begin_layout Standard
29754 By default a simple numeric citation style is used.
29757 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29758 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29762 \begin_inset Index idx
29765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29766 Document ! Settings
29771 you have a range of other options, depending on your preferred bibliography
29777 environment your only choice besides manual formatting of the bibliography
29778 labels, is there to use
29781 \begin_inset space ~
29792 \begin_inset space ~
29797 which gives you author-year and author-numerical citations (see above
29798 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29800 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
29807 \begin_layout Standard
29808 With a bibliography database (see
29809 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29811 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
29818 ) one has in contrary to the
29822 environment full access to the formatting styles.
29823 These style formats are available:
29826 \begin_layout Description
29828 \begin_inset space ~
29831 (BibTeX) the default Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29832 -based approached without any additional packages
29833 (simple numeric citations).
29836 \begin_layout Description
29837 Biblatex loads the package
29842 \begin_inset Index idx
29845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29847 packages ! biblatex
29852 and lets you select a style in the dropdown boxes
29854 Biblatex citation style
29858 Biblatex bibliography style
29861 Options to the package
29865 can be entered in the
29872 \begin_layout Description
29874 \begin_inset space ~
29878 \begin_inset space ~
29881 mode) loads the package
29885 with the natbib compatibility mode.
29886 This is a specific variant for users who switch an existing document that
29898 behavior very closely.
29903 this option has some additional styles.
29908 styles are also supported by this variant.
29911 \begin_layout Description
29913 \begin_inset space ~
29916 (BibTeX) loads the package
29921 \begin_inset Index idx
29924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29931 which provides author-year styles particularly suited for law studies.
29934 \begin_layout Description
29936 \begin_inset space ~
29939 (BibTeX) loads the package
29944 \begin_inset Index idx
29947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29954 which provides citation styles particularly suited for the humanities.
29957 \begin_layout Standard
29966 style formats provide the choice between author-year and author-numerical
29968 You have to select one style in the dropdown box
29977 formats, this only affects the appearance in the \SpecialChar LyX
29979 Whether the output uses numerical, author-year or another format such as
29980 alpha-numerical depends only on the selected
29982 Biblatex citation style
29985 However, when switching between Author-year and Author-number, a suitable
29991 , on the other hand, the dialog selection will ultimately determine the
29995 \begin_layout Standard
29996 For any author-year and author-numerical selection, multiple style variants
29997 are available in the
30002 Some selections also provide further options like the option to uppercase
30003 a name prefix such as
30004 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30008 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30012 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30016 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30019 ) or to expand or reduce the number of displayed others (i.
30020 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30024 \begin_inset space \space{}
30028 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30032 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30039 \begin_layout Standard
30040 In the citation dialog you can also set text to appear after a citation
30042 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30046 \begin_inset space \space{}
30049 page numbers, which will then be formatted according to the style's needs
30051 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30055 \begin_inset space \space{}
30059 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30063 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30071 in the citation dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
30075 \begin_inset space ~
30083 \begin_inset space ~
30089 Here is a simple example where the text
30090 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30094 \begin_inset space ~
30098 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30101 appears after the reference:
30104 \begin_layout Quote
30106 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30109 key "latexcompanion"
30117 \begin_layout Standard
30118 All styles except for
30122 also provide the feature to add text that precedes the reference (such
30124 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30128 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30132 This text is then also included in the parentheses, if the style requires
30136 \begin_layout Standard
30137 Note that these pre- and postnotes apply to the whole citation.
30138 So if you refer to multiple references at once, the prenote will precede
30139 the first citation in the list, the postnote will follow the last.
30144 styles allow to add pre- and postnotes to any individual reference in a
30145 multi-citation (so-called
30146 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30149 qualified citation lists
30150 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30156 If you use such a style and if the current reference includes multiple
30161 dialog will display three columns in the field
30168 \begin_inset space ~
30176 \begin_inset space ~
30184 \begin_inset space ~
30190 If you double-click on an item's
30193 \begin_inset space ~
30201 \begin_inset space ~
30206 field, you can add such individual pre- and postnotes.
30209 General text before
30215 fields you can add pre- and postnotes that apply to the whole list.
30218 \begin_layout Section
30220 \begin_inset Index idx
30223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30230 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30239 \begin_layout Standard
30240 An index entry is created if you use the menu
30242 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30244 \begin_inset space ~
30249 or the toolbar button
30256 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
30257 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
30258 by \SpecialChar LyX
30259 as the index entry.
30262 \begin_layout Standard
30263 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
30265 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30266 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
30268 \begin_inset space ~
30274 A light blue box labeled
30275 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30283 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30286 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
30287 The index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
30291 \begin_layout Standard
30292 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
30293 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
30294 's index mechanism, have a look at one of
30295 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30297 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30299 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
30307 \begin_layout Subsection
30308 Grouping Index Entries
30309 \begin_inset Index idx
30312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30321 \begin_layout Standard
30322 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
30324 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
30325 lists under the entry
30326 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30330 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30334 First we create the entry
30335 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30339 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30343 \begin_inset space ~
30347 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30349 reference "subsec:Lists"
30354 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
30355 \begin_inset space ~
30359 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30361 reference "sec:Itemize"
30365 , we insert the command
30368 \begin_layout Standard
30374 \begin_layout Standard
30378 \begin_layout Standard
30384 \begin_layout Standard
30385 for the enumerated list in section
30386 \begin_inset space ~
30390 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30392 reference "sec:Enumerate"
30399 \begin_layout Standard
30400 The exclamation mark
30401 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30405 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30408 marks the grouping levels.
30409 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
30410 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
30411 If we don't have an index entry for
30412 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30416 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30419 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
30422 \begin_layout Subsection
30424 \begin_inset Index idx
30427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30428 Index ! Page ranges
30436 \begin_layout Standard
30437 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
30439 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
30440 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
30441 an index entry in section
30442 \begin_inset space ~
30446 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30448 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
30455 \begin_layout Standard
30458 Paragraph environments|(
30461 \begin_layout Standard
30462 and another entry at the end of section
30463 \begin_inset space ~
30467 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30469 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
30476 \begin_layout Standard
30479 Paragraph environments|)
30482 \begin_layout Standard
30484 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30492 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30496 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30504 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30507 respectively start and end the index range.
30508 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
30509 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
30510 the pages of the indexed document parts.
30511 An example is the index entry
30512 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30515 Document ! Settings
30516 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30522 \begin_layout Subsection
30524 \begin_inset Index idx
30527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30528 Index ! Cross referencing
30536 \begin_layout Standard
30537 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
30538 We referred for example in the index entry
30539 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30543 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30547 \begin_inset space ~
30551 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30553 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
30557 ) to the index entry
30558 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30562 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30565 in the same section using the entry
30568 \begin_layout Standard
30571 GIF|see{Image formats}
30574 \begin_layout Standard
30575 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
30577 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
30578 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
30581 \begin_layout Subsection
30583 \begin_inset Index idx
30586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30587 Index ! Entry order
30595 \begin_layout Standard
30596 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
30597 follow the rules for the index order.
30598 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
30603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30604 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
30606 \begin_inset space ~
30610 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30612 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
30621 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
30622 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
30623 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30627 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30631 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30635 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30639 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30643 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30647 \begin_inset Index idx
30650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30651 Dummy entries ! maïs
30657 \begin_inset Index idx
30660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30661 Dummy entries ! maître
30667 \begin_inset Index idx
30670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30671 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
30676 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
30677 maïs, maison, maître.
30678 To achieve this, we use the command
30681 \begin_layout Standard
30684 previous entry@current entry
30687 \begin_layout Standard
30688 In our case we want to have
30689 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30693 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30697 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30701 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30704 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
30707 \begin_layout Standard
30713 \begin_layout Standard
30714 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
30715 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
30717 See the next subsection for an example.
30720 \begin_layout Subsection
30722 \begin_inset Index idx
30725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30726 Index ! Entry layout
30734 \begin_layout Standard
30735 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
30736 \begin_inset Index idx
30739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30742 This is an italic dummy entry
30747 You can also format the page number using the character
30748 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30752 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30755 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30756 -command without a backslash.
30757 We can write for example
30760 \begin_layout Standard
30763 italic page number:|textit
30766 \begin_layout Standard
30767 to get the page number in italic.
30768 \begin_inset Index idx
30771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30772 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
30777 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
30778 -commands begin with a backslash, but in this special case
30780 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30788 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30796 \begin_inset space ~
30802 Have a look at section
30803 \begin_inset space ~
30807 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30809 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
30813 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30817 \begin_layout Standard
30818 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30826 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
30830 to generate the index, see section
30831 \begin_inset space ~
30835 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30837 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
30846 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
30851 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
30852 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30855 key "latexcompanion"
30868 \begin_layout Standard
30869 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
30871 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
30872 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
30873 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
30874 If so, put the following in the preamble
30877 \begin_layout Standard
30889 \begin_layout Standard
30893 \begin_layout Standard
30899 \begin_layout Standard
30900 in the index entry.
30901 \begin_inset Index idx
30904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30905 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
30910 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
30911 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
30912 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
30915 \begin_layout Standard
30916 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
30917 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
30918 a bold font for all index entries.
30919 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
30931 documentation for details,
30932 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30934 key "makeindex,xindy"
30942 \begin_layout Subsection
30944 \begin_inset Index idx
30947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30954 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30956 name "subsec:Index-Program"
30963 \begin_layout Standard
30964 If the index generation program
30968 is installed, \SpecialChar LyX
30969 uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
30973 , the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
30974 distribution, is used.
30978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30983 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
30984 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
30985 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
30986 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
30987 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
30997 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
30999 dialog, see section
31000 \begin_inset space ~
31004 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31006 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
31011 The available options are listed and explained in
31012 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31014 key "makeindex-man,xindy"
31020 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
31024 \begin_layout Standard
31025 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
31026 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
31029 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31030 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31034 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
31035 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
31038 \begin_layout Subsection
31042 \begin_layout Standard
31043 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
31044 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
31045 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31049 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31052 next to the standard index.
31054 does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
31055 that add this feature.
31062 \begin_inset Index idx
31065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31067 packages ! splitidx
31072 package to generate multiple indexes.
31073 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
31078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31079 If yours does not ship it, consult the \SpecialChar TeX
31081 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31089 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
31090 style, but it also includes
31091 specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
31092 Please consult the package's manual for details.
31100 \begin_layout Standard
31101 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
31102 for the use of multiple indexes, go to
31104 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31105 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31108 and select the option
31110 Use multiple Indexes
31117 already contains the standard index
31118 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31122 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31126 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
31127 also appear as a heading) to the
31131 input field and press the
31136 The new index now also appears in the list.
31137 If you like, you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
31138 label color to the new index.
31141 \begin_layout Standard
31142 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
31145 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31152 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
31153 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
31154 are additional features:
31157 \begin_layout Itemize
31158 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
31159 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
31162 \begin_layout Itemize
31163 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
31164 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
31169 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
31170 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
31171 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
31172 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
31175 \begin_layout Itemize
31180 allows to use \SpecialChar TeX
31181 code in the name of the index.
31184 \begin_layout Section
31185 Nomenclature/Glossary
31186 \begin_inset Index idx
31189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31196 \begin_inset Index idx
31199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31228 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31230 name "sec:Nomenclature"
31237 \begin_layout Standard
31238 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
31239 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
31240 called nomenclature or glossary.
31243 \begin_layout Standard
31244 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31251 \begin_inset Index idx
31254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31262 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
31264 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31271 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
31275 \begin_layout Standard
31276 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
31277 and then use the menu
31279 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31285 \begin_inset space ~
31290 or the toolbar button
31293 arg "nomencl-insert"
31298 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31306 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31309 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
31312 \begin_layout Standard
31313 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
31314 The first is the term or
31318 that you wish to define.
31323 of the term or symbol.
31326 \begin_layout Standard
31327 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31335 To use \SpecialChar TeX
31336 code for nomenclature entries the option
31340 in the nomenclature dialog has to be used.
31348 \begin_layout Subsection
31349 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
31350 \begin_inset Index idx
31353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31354 Nomenclature ! Layout
31362 \begin_layout Standard
31363 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
31367 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
31370 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31374 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31378 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31382 \begin_inset Newline newline
31390 \begin_inset Newline newline
31396 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31400 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31403 character starts/ends the formula.
31404 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
31405 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with
31407 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31413 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31417 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
31427 \begin_layout Standard
31428 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31429 syntax is given in section
31430 \begin_inset space ~
31434 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31436 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
31443 \begin_layout Standard
31447 \begin_inset space ~
31452 dialog to format the description text; you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
31454 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
31455 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31459 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31463 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31466 in this document is:
31467 \begin_inset Newline newline
31472 dummy entry for the character
31477 \begin_inset Newline newline
31489 \begin_inset space ~
31499 font use the command
31528 \begin_layout Standard
31529 To customize the appearance of all symbols add e.
31530 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31534 \begin_inset space \space{}
31538 \begin_inset Newline newline
31554 \begin_inset Newline newline
31557 to the LaTeX preamble in the document settings.
31558 This command will make the font of all symbols
31565 \begin_inset space ~
31573 \begin_layout Standard
31574 If the characters |
31575 \begin_inset space \space{}
31579 \begin_inset space \space{}
31583 \begin_inset space \space{}
31587 \begin_inset space \space{}
31591 \begin_inset space \space{}
31594 should appear in nomenclature entries containing \SpecialChar TeX
31595 code they need to be escaped
31596 by adding a quote character in front of them.
31597 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
31598 LatexCommand nomenclature
31599 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
31600 description "The quote sign in TeX code is output by writing ' \"\" '."
31608 \begin_layout Subsection
31609 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
31610 \begin_inset Index idx
31613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31614 Nomenclature ! Sort order
31622 \begin_layout Standard
31623 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31624 -code of the symbol
31626 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
31628 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
31631 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
31632 LatexCommand nomenclature
31634 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
31642 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31646 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
31647 LatexCommand nomenclature
31650 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
31656 They will be sorted by
31657 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31665 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31669 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31679 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31683 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31686 will be sorted before the
31690 since the character
31691 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31695 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31698 is considered in sorting.
31701 \begin_layout Standard
31702 To control the sort order, you can edit the
31705 \begin_inset space ~
31710 field of the nomenclature dialog.
31711 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
31713 For the example given, you can insert
31717 in this field for the
31718 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31725 will be located before
31726 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31732 \begin_layout Standard
31733 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
31738 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31748 \begin_layout Subsection
31749 Nomenclature Options
31750 \begin_inset Index idx
31753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31754 Nomenclature ! Options
31760 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31762 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
31769 \begin_layout Standard
31774 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
31775 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
31778 \begin_layout Description
31779 refeq Appends the phrase
31780 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31792 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31795 to every nomenclature entry, where
31801 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
31804 \begin_layout Description
31805 refpage Appends the phrase
31806 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31818 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31821 to every nomenclature entry, where
31827 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
31830 \begin_layout Description
31831 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
31834 \begin_layout Standard
31835 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
31836 class options list in the
31838 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31842 In this document the options
31849 \begin_layout Standard
31850 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
31856 \begin_layout Standard
31857 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
31858 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
31863 field in the nomenclature dialog:
31866 \begin_layout Description
31876 \begin_layout Description
31879 nomrefpage Like the
31886 \begin_layout Description
31889 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
31898 \begin_layout Description
31902 \begin_inset space ~
31908 \begin_inset space ~
31913 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
31916 \begin_layout Standard
31918 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31922 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31925 are automatically translated for most document languages.
31926 If not, add these lines in front of the nomenclature list as \SpecialChar TeX
31930 \begin_layout Standard
31939 \begin_inset Newline newline
31945 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
31948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31949 \begin_inset space ~
31961 unskip, see equation
31964 \begin_inset Newline newline
31971 pagedeclaration}[1]{
31972 \begin_inset Newline newline
31978 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
31981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31982 \begin_inset space ~
31999 \begin_layout Standard
32000 If the numbers should be hyperlinks, assure that you use
32003 \begin_inset space ~
32008 in the document settings under
32011 \begin_inset space ~
32019 \begin_layout Standard
32027 \begin_inset Newline newline
32031 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
32034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32035 \begin_inset space ~
32047 hyperlink{equation.#1}{equation
32049 nobreakspace{}(#1)}}
32050 \begin_inset Newline newline
32057 pagedeclaration}[1]{
32058 \begin_inset Newline newline
32062 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
32065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32066 \begin_inset space ~
32078 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
32083 \begin_layout Subsection
32084 Printing the Nomenclature
32085 \begin_inset Index idx
32088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32089 Nomenclature ! Printing
32097 \begin_layout Standard
32098 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
32100 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32101 Lists/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
32106 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32114 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32117 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
32118 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
32119 You can choose between these settings:
32122 \begin_layout Description
32123 Default a space of 1
32124 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32130 \begin_layout Description
32132 \begin_inset space ~
32136 \begin_inset space ~
32139 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
32142 \begin_layout Description
32143 Custom custom space
32146 \begin_layout Standard
32147 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
32148 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32152 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32156 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
32164 For example, in order to change the name to
32168 , add the following line to the preamble:
32171 \begin_layout Standard
32184 nomname{List of Symbols}}}
32187 \begin_layout Standard
32188 When you are using another document language than English, replace
32189 \begin_inset Newline newline
32204 , where *** is the name of the language used.
32207 \begin_layout Subsection
32208 Nomenclature Program
32209 \begin_inset Index idx
32212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32213 Nomenclature ! Program
32219 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32221 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
32228 \begin_layout Standard
32234 , that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
32235 distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
32237 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
32242 by adding options, see section
32243 \begin_inset space ~
32247 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32249 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
32254 The available options are listed and explained in
32255 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32257 key "nomencl,makeindex"
32265 \begin_layout Section
32267 \begin_inset Index idx
32270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32277 \begin_inset Index idx
32280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32281 Document ! Branches
32287 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32289 name "sec:Branches"
32296 \begin_layout Standard
32297 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
32298 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
32299 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
32300 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
32303 \begin_layout Standard
32304 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
32305 allows you to put text into branches.
32306 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
32307 To create a branch, either select the menu
32309 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32310 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
32313 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
32315 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32322 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
32323 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
32324 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
32325 and whether the name of the branch should
32326 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
32327 (see below for an example).
32328 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
32329 to the name of the other) and to add
32330 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32334 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32338 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32342 \begin_inset space ~
32345 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
32346 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
32349 \begin_layout Standard
32350 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
32351 These boxes are inserted via the menu
32353 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32356 where you can choose a branch.
32357 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
32361 \begin_layout Standard
32362 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
32363 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
32366 \begin_layout Standard
32367 \begin_inset Branch Question
32371 \begin_layout Standard
32376 Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
32384 \begin_layout Standard
32385 \begin_inset Branch Answer
32389 \begin_layout Standard
32394 Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
32402 \begin_layout Standard
32409 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32410 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32413 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
32414 Consider for example a file
32415 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32419 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32422 which has the above branches.
32424 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32428 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32431 is active, the PDF export file would be called
32432 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32436 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32440 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32444 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32448 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32452 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32455 branch were inactive,
32456 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32460 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32464 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32468 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32471 branch was active, likewise
32472 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32476 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32480 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32484 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32487 branch was active, and
32488 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32491 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
32492 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32495 if both branches were active.
32496 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
32497 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
32503 \begin_layout Standard
32504 There are also inverted branch insets, whose content is output just in case
32510 This make it easy to add alternative text for different versions of a document.
32511 To control whether a particular inset is inverted, right-click on the inset
32515 \begin_inset space ~
32523 \begin_layout Standard
32524 \begin_inset Branch Answer
32528 \begin_layout Standard
32534 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32538 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32541 branch is deactivated.
32547 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
32553 \begin_layout Standard
32554 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
32555 like inside equations, you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
32556 definitions for each branch.
32557 For example you can define for the question branch
32561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32562 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32563 -syntax, see section
32564 \begin_inset space ~
32568 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32570 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
32582 \begin_layout Standard
32592 \begin_layout Standard
32602 \begin_layout Standard
32603 and for the answer branch
32606 \begin_layout Standard
32616 \begin_layout Standard
32626 \begin_layout Standard
32627 \begin_inset Branch Question
32631 \begin_layout Standard
32635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32663 \begin_layout Standard
32664 \begin_inset Branch Answer
32668 \begin_layout Standard
32672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32700 \begin_layout Standard
32701 Now it is possible to use the
32705 question{\SpecialChar ldots
32712 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
32715 commands to obtain conditional output.
32716 Here is an example formula where only the
32723 \begin_inset Formula
32725 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
32733 \begin_layout Standard
32734 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
32742 \begin_layout Standard
32743 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
32745 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32749 \begin_inset space \space{}
32752 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
32754 For this advanced usage, see the
32760 Flex insets and InsetLayout
32765 \begin_layout Section
32767 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32769 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
32774 \begin_inset Index idx
32777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32786 \begin_layout Standard
32789 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32790 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32793 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
32795 All these options are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32801 \begin_inset Index idx
32804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32806 packages ! hyperref
32811 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
32812 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
32813 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
32814 part of the document.
32818 \begin_layout Standard
32819 The header information in the dialog tab
32823 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
32824 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
32825 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
32826 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
32830 \begin_inset space ~
32834 \begin_inset space ~
32839 is set, \SpecialChar LyX
32840 tries to extract the header information from your document title
32841 and author entries.
32845 \begin_inset space ~
32849 \begin_inset space ~
32853 \begin_inset space ~
32858 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
32861 \begin_layout Standard
32862 You can specify in the dialog tab
32866 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
32871 \begin_inset space ~
32875 \begin_inset space ~
32879 \begin_inset space ~
32884 option allows long links to be split;
32887 \begin_inset space ~
32891 \begin_inset space ~
32895 \begin_inset space ~
32903 \begin_inset space ~
32908 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
32911 \begin_inset space ~
32916 colors the different links.
32917 The default colors are:
32920 \begin_layout Labeling
32921 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
32926 for hyperlinks and URLs
32929 \begin_layout Labeling
32930 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
32938 \begin_layout Labeling
32939 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
32947 \begin_layout Standard
32948 but you can change these in the field
32953 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
32956 \begin_layout Standard
32959 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
32962 \begin_layout Standard
32967 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
32968 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
32969 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
32972 \begin_layout Standard
32977 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
32978 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
32979 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
32989 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
32990 when opening the PDF.
32992 \begin_inset space ~
32995 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
32996 \begin_inset space ~
32999 1 will only display the sections.
33002 \begin_layout Standard
33003 PDF properties are also used in this document.
33004 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
33010 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
33011 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33021 \begin_layout Section
33023 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33025 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33027 name "sec:TeX-Code"
33034 \begin_layout Subsection
33037 \begin_inset Index idx
33040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33048 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33050 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
33057 \begin_layout Standard
33058 As \SpecialChar LyX
33059 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
33060 in the background, it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
33061 commands and constructs,
33064 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
33065 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
33066 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
33067 is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
33068 -package for every problem, though \SpecialChar LyX
33069 cannot support all packages and
33073 \begin_layout Standard
33074 But don't worry, you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
33075 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
33076 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
33080 Code box is created by the menu
33082 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33084 \begin_inset space ~
33089 or by the toolbar button
33102 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
33110 \begin_layout Standard
33111 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
33113 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
33115 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word
33119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33120 The LyX way would be to use a framed box.
33125 and are therefore using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33132 , you can write the command part
33138 in a \SpecialChar TeX
33139 Code box before the word and the closing brace
33143 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
33144 Code box behind the word.
33145 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
33146 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the
33150 \begin_layout Standard
33151 \begin_inset Graphics
33152 filename clipart/ERT.png
33160 \begin_layout Standard
33164 \begin_layout Standard
33165 This is a line with a
33169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33192 \begin_layout Standard
33193 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
33196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33201 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
33202 -commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
33203 to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
33204 know that the command is finished.
33212 \begin_layout Subsection
33213 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33215 \begin_inset Argument 1
33218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33219 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
33226 \begin_inset Index idx
33229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33237 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33239 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
33246 \begin_layout Standard
33247 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
33248 about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33249 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
33250 uses in the background.
33251 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
33252 is based on commands, you can
33253 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33257 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33261 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
33262 any time if you know the right commands.
33263 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
33264 is the end of the day.
33265 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
33266 all caption labels bold.
33267 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
33269 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
33273 \begin_layout Standard
33274 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
33276 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
33278 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33281 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33291 \begin_layout Standard
33292 As result you find that the package
33297 \begin_inset Index idx
33300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33308 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
33310 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33313 \SpecialChar menuseparator
33317 \begin_inset space ~
33325 \begin_layout Standard
33330 usepackage[options]{package name}
33333 \begin_layout Standard
33334 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
33335 commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
33336 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
33337 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
33340 \begin_layout Standard
33341 In your case the package name is
33346 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
33351 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
33352 So you add the command
33355 \begin_layout Standard
33360 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
33363 \begin_layout Standard
33364 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
33368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33369 For more commands provided by the
33373 package, have a look at its documentation,
33374 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33389 \begin_layout Standard
33390 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
33392 For example if you use a
33396 class, you don't need the package
33400 , you can instead write
33403 \begin_layout Standard
33408 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
33413 \begin_layout Standard
33414 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
33415 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
33416 documentation of the document class you want to use.
33423 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
33426 \begin_layout Standard
33427 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
33428 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
33430 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
33431 -command in text, use the \SpecialChar TeX
33432 Code box as described in the previous
33436 \begin_layout Standard
33437 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
33438 and its syntax, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33441 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33443 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
33451 \begin_layout Standard
33452 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
33458 \begin_layout Standard
33462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33472 \begin_inset Note Note
33475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33476 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
33484 \begin_layout Left Header
33485 \begin_inset Argument 1
33488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33508 \begin_inset Note Note
33511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33512 defines the header line as described below
33520 \begin_layout Center Header
33521 \begin_inset Argument 1
33524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33533 \begin_layout Right Header
33534 \begin_inset Argument 1
33537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33558 \begin_layout Left Footer
33559 \begin_inset Argument 1
33562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33583 \begin_layout Center Footer
33584 \begin_inset Argument 1
33587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33599 \begin_inset Newline newline
33603 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
33609 \begin_layout Right Footer
33610 \begin_inset Argument 1
33613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33635 \begin_layout Section
33636 Customized Page Headers and Footers
33637 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33639 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
33644 \begin_inset Index idx
33647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33648 Document ! Header/Footer line
33654 \begin_inset Index idx
33657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33666 \begin_layout Standard
33667 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
33671 \begin_inset space ~
33682 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33688 \begin_inset space ~
33694 As a second step add in the menu
33696 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33697 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33701 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33706 Custom Header/Footerlines
33709 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33713 This module offers the following 6
33714 \begin_inset space ~
33720 \begin_layout Description
33722 \begin_inset space ~
33726 \begin_inset space ~
33730 \begin_inset space ~
33734 \begin_inset space ~
33738 \begin_inset space ~
33744 \begin_layout Description
33746 \begin_inset space ~
33750 \begin_inset space ~
33754 \begin_inset space ~
33758 \begin_inset space ~
33762 \begin_inset space ~
33768 \begin_layout Standard
33769 for the different positions in the header/footer.
33770 These environments can be selected in the environment pull-down box.
33773 \begin_layout Standard
33774 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
33775 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
33777 \begin_inset space ~
33781 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33783 reference "fig:Page-layout"
33787 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
33790 \begin_layout Standard
33791 \begin_inset Float figure
33797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33800 \begin_inset Tabular
33801 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
33802 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
33803 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
33804 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
33805 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
33807 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33816 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
33819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33825 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33836 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33845 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33854 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33865 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
33868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33869 The normal text on the page goes here.
33870 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
33872 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
33873 the chapter, company logo but you can use almost anything, except of floats.
33878 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33887 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33898 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33907 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33916 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33927 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33936 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
33939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33945 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33963 \begin_inset Caption Standard
33965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33966 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33968 name "fig:Page-layout"
33972 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
33985 \begin_layout Standard
33986 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
33989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33994 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
33998 \begin_inset space ~
34003 is set to “Default”.
34004 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
34013 \begin_layout Subsection
34017 \begin_layout Standard
34018 To define your header line, add all three header environments.
34019 The things you add to each environment appear on odd numbered pages, the
34020 things in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
34021 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
34023 If you leave a header environment or its argument empty, nothing appears
34025 Defining the footer line works similarly.
34028 \begin_layout Standard
34029 For the definition, you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
34030 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
34034 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34036 \begin_inset space ~
34044 \begin_layout Description
34047 thepage prints the current page number
34050 \begin_layout Description
34053 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
34056 \begin_layout Description
34059 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
34062 \begin_layout Description
34065 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
34066 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
34069 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34073 \begin_inset Quotes prd
34076 because it usually goes in a left header.
34079 \begin_layout Description
34082 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
34083 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
34085 It is normally used in the right header.
34088 \begin_layout Subsection
34089 Default header/footer
34092 \begin_layout Standard
34093 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
34094 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
34095 footer has the page number.
34096 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
34097 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
34098 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
34101 \begin_inset space ~
34109 \begin_layout Subsection
34113 \begin_layout Standard
34114 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
34115 Some pages are different.
34116 The title page has a header/footer environment of its own, and so does
34117 any page that starts a new part or chapter in your book.
34118 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
34119 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
34120 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
34123 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34124 Header and footer decoration line
34127 \begin_layout Standard
34128 By default, you get a 0.4
34129 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34132 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
34133 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
34145 in the following way:
34148 \begin_layout Standard
34155 headrulewidth}{thickness}
34158 \begin_layout Standard
34159 where thickness is a size in standard units like
34172 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
34173 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34179 \begin_layout Standard
34180 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
34182 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in section
34183 \begin_inset space ~
34187 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34197 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34198 Several header/footer lines
34201 \begin_layout Standard
34202 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
34203 this by adding a ragged line break in the style definition.
34204 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the height of
34206 To expand the height, redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34221 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34222 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34224 \begin_inset space ~
34232 \begin_layout Standard
34239 headheight}{height}
34242 \begin_layout Standard
34247 is a size in standard units (e.
34248 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34252 \begin_inset space \space{}
34260 If you don't know how much space is needed for the height, define your
34261 header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
34262 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34263 logfile with the menu
34265 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34267 \begin_inset space ~
34275 \begin_inset space ~
34280 to see if you can find a warning about the package
34285 \begin_inset Index idx
34288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34290 packages ! fancyhdr
34296 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
34297 for your header/footer.
34300 \begin_layout Subsection
34304 \begin_layout Standard
34305 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
34306 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
34307 This example consists of the following definition:
34310 \begin_layout Description
34312 \begin_inset space ~
34321 , empty optional argument
34324 \begin_layout Description
34326 \begin_inset space ~
34329 Header empty, empty optional argument
34332 \begin_layout Description
34334 \begin_inset space ~
34343 in the optional argument
34346 \begin_layout Description
34348 \begin_inset space ~
34357 in the optional argument
34360 \begin_layout Description
34362 \begin_inset space ~
34375 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34379 \begin_inset Newline newline
34383 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
34387 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34390 in the optional argument
34393 \begin_layout Description
34395 \begin_inset space ~
34404 , empty optional argument
34407 \begin_layout Description
34410 headrulewidth set to 2
34411 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34417 \begin_layout Standard
34418 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
34419 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
34425 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34435 \begin_layout Standard
34436 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
34442 \begin_layout Standard
34446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34450 pagestyle{headings}
34456 \begin_inset Note Note
34459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34460 switches back to page style with the default headings
34468 \begin_layout Section
34469 Previewing Snippets of your Document
34470 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34472 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
34477 \begin_inset Index idx
34480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34487 \begin_inset Index idx
34490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34499 \begin_layout Standard
34501 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly
34502 so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
34503 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
34506 \begin_layout Subsection
34510 \begin_layout Standard
34511 To get previews working, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34517 \begin_inset Index idx
34520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34522 packages ! preview-latex
34527 (on some systems named simply
34532 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
34534 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34541 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
34543 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
34551 package; for \SpecialChar LyX
34552 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34553 -package are automatically
34554 installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
34558 \begin_layout Subsection
34562 \begin_layout Standard
34563 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
34564 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
34566 activate the option
34569 \begin_inset space ~
34576 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34582 \begin_inset space ~
34586 \begin_inset space ~
34589 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
34596 \begin_inset space ~
34609 \begin_inset space ~
34614 is the multiplication factor for the size.
34617 \begin_layout Standard
34618 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
34623 \begin_inset space ~
34631 \begin_inset space ~
34639 \begin_layout Standard
34640 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
34641 and when you finish
34645 \begin_layout Standard
34646 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34654 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
34655 generated by activating the option
34658 \begin_inset space ~
34664 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
34672 \begin_layout Subsection
34673 Selected document parts
34676 \begin_layout Standard
34677 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
34678 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
34679 cannot render like rotated parts or things that
34680 are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
34682 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
34684 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34688 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
34689 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
34690 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
34693 \begin_layout Standard
34694 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34701 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
34706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34713 is explained in section
34715 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
34720 \begin_inset space ~
34730 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
34731 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
34732 the final rotated boxes,
34733 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
34734 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
34736 Here is the result:
34739 \begin_layout Standard
34740 \begin_inset Preview
34742 \begin_layout Standard
34747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34751 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
34757 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
34767 height_special "totalheight"
34772 backgroundcolor "none"
34775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34800 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
34806 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
34813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34828 \begin_layout Standard
34829 Previewing works also for colors.
34830 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34849 is explained in section
34856 \begin_inset space ~
34869 \begin_layout Standard
34870 \begin_inset Preview
34872 \begin_layout Standard
34876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34895 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
34900 This is text within a colored, framed box.
34904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34919 \begin_layout Standard
34920 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
34926 \begin_layout Standard
34927 If \SpecialChar LyX
34928 does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
34929 above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
34930 Code in the preview inset is valid and that
34931 you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34932 packages in your document preamble that are required by
34933 the \SpecialChar TeX
34935 If \SpecialChar LyX
34936 cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able to
34937 view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
34939 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
34940 Code and don't know if it is correct, the preview
34941 inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
34944 \begin_layout Subsection
34949 \begin_layout Standard
34950 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34951 source of the whole document or parts of it.
34954 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
34956 \begin_inset space ~
34961 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34963 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
34965 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
34966 's main window, then only this selection
34967 (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
34968 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
34969 the source view window.
34974 , you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
34975 ; but note that if you have
34976 several documents open, this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
34978 not just the one which is open at the time.
34981 \begin_layout Section
34982 Advanced Find and Replace
34983 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34985 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
34990 \begin_inset Index idx
34993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35000 \begin_inset Index idx
35003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35012 \begin_layout Subsection
35016 \begin_layout Standard
35017 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
35018 allows for searching of complex,
35019 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
35021 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
35022 The key-features are:
35025 \begin_layout Itemize
35026 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
35027 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
35028 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
35032 \begin_layout Itemize
35033 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
35034 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
35035 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
35036 a section heading will only be found within section headings
35039 \begin_layout Itemize
35040 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
35041 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
35042 outside of mathematics environments
35045 \begin_layout Itemize
35046 Search may be widened to a specific
35051 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35055 \begin_inset space ~
35058 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
35059 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
35066 \begin_layout Itemize
35067 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
35068 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
35069 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35073 \begin_inset space ~
35076 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
35079 \begin_layout Subsection
35083 \begin_layout Standard
35084 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
35086 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
35099 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
35102 ) or the toolbar button
35105 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
35111 Advanced Find and Replace
35116 \begin_layout Subsubsection
35120 \begin_layout Standard
35126 mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
35130 \begin_inset space ~
35135 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
35138 arg "paragraph-break"
35142 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
35143 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
35147 arg "paragraph-break"
35150 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
35154 searches backwards.
35157 \begin_layout Standard
35161 \begin_inset space ~
35166 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
35175 \begin_inset space ~
35180 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
35183 \begin_layout Subsubsection
35184 Searching for mathematics
35187 \begin_layout Standard
35188 Mathematical formulas, such as
35189 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
35192 or something more complex like
35193 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
35196 , may be searched for by typing them in the
35201 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
35202 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
35203 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
35204 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}$
35210 \begin_layout Subsubsection
35214 \begin_layout Standard
35215 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
35216 This is done by switching to the
35220 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
35225 This way, entering in the
35232 \begin_layout Itemize
35233 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
35234 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
35237 \begin_layout Itemize
35238 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
35239 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
35242 \begin_layout Itemize
35243 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
35244 of it only within section headings.
35245 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
35246 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
35250 \begin_layout Itemize
35251 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
35252 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
35255 \begin_layout Subsubsection
35259 \begin_layout Standard
35260 The entries made in the
35264 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
35267 \begin_inset space ~
35273 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
35277 button or alternatively press
35280 arg "paragraph-break"
35287 while the cursor is in the
35290 \begin_inset space ~
35298 \begin_layout Standard
35299 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
35301 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
35305 \begin_layout Itemize
35306 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
35307 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
35308 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35312 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35315 with its typewriter version
35316 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35324 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35330 \begin_layout Itemize
35331 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
35333 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35337 \begin_inset Formula $R$
35341 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35345 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35349 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
35353 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35356 (you may want to enable the
35359 \begin_inset space ~
35367 \begin_inset space ~
35372 options and disable the
35380 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
35381 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35385 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35388 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
35389 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
35393 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
35396 , or occurrences of
35397 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
35401 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
35407 \begin_layout Subsection
35411 \begin_layout Standard
35412 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
35416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35417 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
35419 \begin_inset CommandInset href
35421 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
35431 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
35437 This is done with the context menu
35439 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35440 Insert Regular Expression
35442 while the cursor is in the
35447 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
35448 expression matching rules
35452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35453 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
35456 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35460 \begin_inset space ~
35463 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
35464 code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to
35470 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
35471 same text in the document.
35472 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
35473 Examples of using such a feature may be:
35476 \begin_layout Enumerate
35477 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
35482 editor the fraction
35483 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
35487 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
35490 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
35491 fractions with the given denominator.
35494 \begin_layout Enumerate
35495 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
35507 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
35512 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
35513 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
35514 Also, by inserting a
35515 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
35518 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
35519 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
35522 \begin_layout Standard
35523 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
35524 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
35525 \begin_inset Formula $()$
35528 , and referring back to them through
35529 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
35533 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
35537 For example, try searching with the regexp
35538 \begin_inset Newline newline
35541 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
35544 \begin_inset Newline newline
35547 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
35550 \begin_layout Standard
35551 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
35554 \begin_layout Standard
35555 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35563 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
35564 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
35565 sub-expressions is absolute.
35567 \begin_inset space ~
35571 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
35574 always refers to the first occurrence of
35575 \begin_inset Formula $()$
35578 in all entered regexps.
35586 \begin_layout Section
35588 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35590 name "sec:Spellchecking"
35595 \begin_inset Index idx
35598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35607 \begin_layout Standard
35609 has a built-in spell checker.
35612 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35619 key or the toolbar button
35622 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
35625 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
35626 beginning of the currently selected text.
35627 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
35628 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
35629 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
35630 scrolled so that it is visible.
35631 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
35632 n, if any could be found.
35633 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
35637 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
35638 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
35641 \begin_layout Standard
35642 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
35645 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35649 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
35650 a different one at the top of the dialog.
35652 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
35653 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
35656 \begin_inset space ~
35664 arg "dialog-show character"
35667 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
35669 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
35672 \begin_layout Standard
35673 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
35674 can be downloaded from here:
35675 \begin_inset Newline newline
35679 \begin_inset Flex URL
35682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35684 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
35690 \begin_inset Newline newline
35694 \begin_inset space ~
35697 files for each language.
35698 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
35699 \begin_inset space ~
35702 files into \SpecialChar LyX
35703 's installation subfolder
35711 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
35713 \begin_inset Newline newline
35716 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
35717 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
35718 but in most cases these are
35734 is the language code.
35737 \begin_layout Subsection
35741 \begin_layout Standard
35744 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35745 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35747 \begin_inset space ~
35750 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35753 you can set the following things:
35756 \begin_layout Description
35758 \begin_inset space ~
35761 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
35762 should use for spell checking.
35763 Depending on your platform,
35773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35774 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
35775 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
35790 \begin_inset space ~
35793 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
35796 \begin_layout Description
35798 \begin_inset space ~
35801 language If this field is not empty, \SpecialChar LyX
35802 will always use the given language
35803 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
35806 \begin_layout Description
35808 \begin_inset space ~
35811 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
35813 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35817 \begin_inset space \space{}
35821 This should normally not be needed.
35824 \begin_layout Description
35826 \begin_inset space ~
35830 \begin_inset space ~
35833 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
35835 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35839 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35845 \begin_layout Description
35847 \begin_inset space ~
35850 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
35851 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
35852 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
35853 appear in a context menu.
35854 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
35858 \begin_layout Description
35860 \begin_inset space ~
35864 \begin_inset space ~
35868 \begin_inset space ~
35871 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
35875 \begin_layout Section
35877 \begin_inset Index idx
35880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35887 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35889 name "sec:Thesaurus"
35896 \begin_layout Standard
35898 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
35899 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
35908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35909 \begin_inset CommandInset href
35911 target "https://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
35921 thesaurus library, which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
35923 Therefore, \SpecialChar LyX
35924 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
35925 which are available for many languages.
35928 \begin_layout Standard
35929 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
35930 the use with \SpecialChar LyX
35934 \begin_layout Subsection
35935 Setting up the thesaurus
35938 \begin_layout Standard
35947 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
35951 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
35956 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
35958 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35962 \begin_inset space ~
35970 For instance, the US English files are named:
35973 \begin_layout Itemize
35977 \begin_layout Itemize
35981 \begin_layout Standard
35990 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
35991 and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
35994 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35995 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35996 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
35998 \begin_inset space ~
36003 ) to the path where they are installed.
36007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36008 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
36009 ies, typical locations are
36015 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
36019 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
36023 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
36026 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
36032 LibreOffice-<Version>
36039 On the Mac, the default location is
36041 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
36042 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
36043 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
36044 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
36045 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
36046 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
36054 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
36055 during the \SpecialChar LyX
36056 installation process, which will then be installed in the correct
36060 \begin_layout Standard
36061 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
36062 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
36064 \begin_inset Newline newline
36068 \begin_inset Flex URL
36071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36073 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/thesaurus/
36081 \begin_layout Standard
36082 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
36083 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
36085 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36086 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
36087 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
36089 \begin_inset space ~
36094 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
36096 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
36097 and point \SpecialChar LyX
36101 \begin_layout Standard
36102 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
36104 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
36107 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
36113 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
36116 If you do this, make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
36117 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
36119 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36125 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36126 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
36127 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
36129 \begin_inset space ~
36134 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
36137 \begin_layout Subsection
36138 Using the thesaurus
36141 \begin_layout Standard
36142 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
36144 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36147 or the toolbar button
36150 arg "thesaurus-entry"
36153 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
36155 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
36157 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
36158 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
36159 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
36168 ), related terms (such as
36171 \begin_inset space ~
36180 ), compounds (such as
36183 \begin_inset space ~
36192 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
36201 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
36204 \begin_layout Standard
36205 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
36206 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
36210 \begin_layout Standard
36211 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
36212 the dictionary, such as the above
36216 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
36217 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36221 \begin_inset space \space{}
36224 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
36225 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
36226 For example, looking up the word form
36230 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
36235 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
36236 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36240 \begin_inset space \space{}
36251 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
36252 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
36253 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
36256 \begin_layout Section
36258 \begin_inset Index idx
36261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36268 \begin_inset Index idx
36271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36272 Document ! Change Tracking
36278 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36280 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
36287 \begin_layout Standard
36288 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
36289 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
36290 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
36291 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
36293 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36295 \begin_inset space ~
36298 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36300 \begin_inset space ~
36308 \begin_layout Standard
36309 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
36323 The color depends on the author that made the change.
36324 You can change the color in
36326 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36327 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
36329 \begin_inset space ~
36333 \begin_inset space ~
36338 \SpecialChar menuseparator
36344 \begin_inset Index idx
36347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36348 Color ! Change tracking
36353 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
36354 's status bar when the
36355 cursor is in changed text.
36356 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
36359 arg "changes-merge"
36365 \begin_layout Standard
36366 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
36368 \begin_inset Index idx
36371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36380 \begin_layout Standard
36381 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
36387 \begin_layout Standard
36388 \begin_inset Graphics
36389 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
36397 \begin_layout Standard
36398 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
36404 \begin_layout Standard
36405 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
36408 \begin_layout Standard
36409 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
36415 \begin_layout Standard
36416 \begin_inset Tabular
36417 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
36418 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
36419 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
36420 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
36421 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36422 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36430 arg "changes-track"
36438 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36444 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36446 \begin_inset space ~
36449 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36451 \begin_inset space ~
36460 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36461 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36469 arg "changes-output"
36477 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36483 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36485 \begin_inset space ~
36488 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36490 \begin_inset space ~
36494 \begin_inset space ~
36498 \begin_inset space ~
36507 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36508 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36524 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36528 Jumps to the next change
36534 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36535 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36543 arg "change-accept"
36551 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36557 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36559 \begin_inset space ~
36562 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36564 \begin_inset space ~
36573 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36574 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36582 arg "change-reject"
36590 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36596 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36598 \begin_inset space ~
36601 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36603 \begin_inset space ~
36612 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36613 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36621 arg "changes-merge"
36629 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36635 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36637 \begin_inset space ~
36640 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36642 \begin_inset space ~
36651 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36652 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36660 arg "all-changes-accept"
36668 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36674 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36676 \begin_inset space ~
36679 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36681 \begin_inset space ~
36685 \begin_inset space ~
36694 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36695 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36703 arg "all-changes-reject"
36711 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36717 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36719 \begin_inset space ~
36722 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36724 \begin_inset space ~
36728 \begin_inset space ~
36737 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36738 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36754 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36760 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
36761 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
36763 \begin_inset space ~
36772 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36773 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36789 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36795 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
36797 \begin_inset space ~
36813 \begin_layout Standard
36814 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
36820 \begin_layout Standard
36821 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
36841 \begin_layout Standard
36842 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
36843 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
36844 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
36845 the next change after the current cursor position.
36846 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
36847 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
36848 step to the next change.
36849 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
36852 \begin_layout Standard
36853 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
36854 to describe a change.
36857 \begin_layout Standard
36858 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36864 \begin_inset Index idx
36867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36875 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
36877 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36884 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
36888 \begin_layout Section
36889 Comparison of Documents
36890 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36892 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
36897 \begin_inset Index idx
36900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36901 Comparison of documents
36909 \begin_layout Standard
36910 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
36913 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36917 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
36918 file with change tracking enabled showing the
36920 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
36922 the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
36926 \begin_inset space ~
36930 \begin_inset space ~
36934 \begin_inset space ~
36943 \begin_inset space ~
36947 \begin_inset space ~
36951 \begin_inset space ~
36955 \begin_inset space ~
36959 \begin_inset space ~
36963 \begin_inset space ~
36968 enables the change tracking option
36971 \begin_inset space ~
36975 \begin_inset space ~
36979 \begin_inset space ~
36984 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
36987 \begin_layout Section
36988 International Support
36989 \begin_inset Index idx
36992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36993 International support
37001 \begin_layout Standard
37002 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
37003 with any language you want.
37004 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
37005 up \SpecialChar LyX
37007 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
37009 key "Arabic,Armenian,Cyrillic,Farsi,Hebrew,Japanese"
37017 \begin_layout Standard
37018 Besides languages, \SpecialChar LyX
37019 also supports phonetic symbols, see section
37020 \begin_inset space ~
37024 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37026 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
37033 \begin_layout Subsection
37035 \begin_inset Index idx
37038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37045 \begin_inset Index idx
37048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37049 Document ! Settings
37055 \begin_inset Index idx
37058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37059 Document ! Language
37067 \begin_layout Standard
37070 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37071 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37074 dialog lets you set
37076 the language, the quote style and character encoding
37081 \begin_layout Standard
37086 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
37091 \begin_inset space ~
37096 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
37097 For details about the different encoding options see section
37098 \begin_inset space ~
37102 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37104 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
37111 \begin_layout Subsection
37112 Keyboard mapping configuration
37113 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37115 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
37122 \begin_layout Standard
37123 If you have for example a U.
37124 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37127 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
37128 can use an alternate keymap.
37129 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
37134 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37135 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37136 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
37139 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
37140 \begin_inset space ~
37144 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37146 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
37151 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
37152 which one you want to use.
37155 \begin_layout Standard
37156 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
37157 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
37158 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
37159 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37162 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
37163 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
37164 one to support the characters you want.
37165 This and many other customizations are explained in the
37172 \begin_layout Chapter
37175 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37177 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
37184 \begin_layout Standard
37185 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
37186 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
37187 topic inside the user's guide.
37190 \begin_layout Section
37192 \begin_inset Index idx
37195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37204 \begin_layout Standard
37209 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
37212 \begin_layout Subsection
37216 \begin_layout Standard
37217 Creates a new document.
37220 \begin_layout Subsection
37224 \begin_layout Standard
37225 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
37226 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
37227 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
37230 \begin_layout Subsection
37234 \begin_layout Standard
37238 \begin_layout Subsection
37242 \begin_layout Standard
37243 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
37244 Click there on a file to open it.
37247 \begin_layout Subsection
37251 \begin_layout Standard
37252 Closes the current document.
37255 \begin_layout Subsection
37259 \begin_layout Standard
37260 Closes all opened documents.
37263 \begin_layout Subsection
37267 \begin_layout Standard
37268 Saves the actual document.
37271 \begin_layout Subsection
37275 \begin_layout Standard
37276 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
37279 \begin_layout Subsection
37283 \begin_layout Standard
37284 Saves all opened documents.
37287 \begin_layout Subsection
37291 \begin_layout Standard
37292 Reloads the actual document from disk.
37295 \begin_layout Subsection
37299 \begin_layout Standard
37300 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
37301 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
37302 It is described in the section
37304 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
37309 Additional Features
37314 \begin_layout Subsection
37318 \begin_layout Standard
37319 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
37320 versions, HTML files, \SpecialChar LaTeX
37322 files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files (CSV).
37323 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
37327 \begin_layout Standard
37328 When using the menu entry
37331 \begin_inset space ~
37336 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
37340 \begin_inset space ~
37344 \begin_inset space ~
37348 \begin_inset space ~
37353 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
37354 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
37357 \begin_layout Subsection
37359 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37361 name "subsec:Export"
37368 \begin_layout Standard
37369 You can export your document to various file formats.
37370 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
37372 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
37373 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
37374 during its configuration.
37377 \begin_layout Standard
37378 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
37380 \begin_inset space ~
37384 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37386 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
37393 \begin_layout Description
37399 \begin_inset space ~
37402 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
37404 \begin_inset space ~
37407 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
37408 \begin_inset Newline newline
37411 Since \SpecialChar LyX
37412 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
37416 \begin_layout Description
37417 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
37423 \begin_layout Description
37425 \begin_inset space ~
37428 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
37434 \begin_layout Description
37435 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
37436 's native DVI-format.
37437 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
37438 files paths or file names in your document.
37440 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
37447 \begin_layout Description
37448 DVI DVI-format that also allows the useage of special characters or spaces
37449 in files paths or file names
37452 \begin_layout Description
37454 \begin_inset space ~
37461 ) DVI-format using the program
37463 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
37466 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
37470 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
37473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37478 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
37486 \begin_layout Description
37488 \begin_inset space ~
37491 (cropped) the same as
37495 but with cropped page margins.
37498 \begin_layout Description
37500 \begin_inset space ~
37503 Dot text file with code in the programming language
37507 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
37512 \begin_layout Description
37516 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
37519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37524 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
37532 \begin_layout Description
37534 \begin_inset space ~
37538 \begin_inset space ~
37541 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
37545 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
37553 \begin_layout Description
37557 \begin_inset space ~
37566 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37567 source that is compilable with the program
37569 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
37573 \begin_layout Description
37577 \begin_inset space ~
37582 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37583 source, additionally all images used in the document
37584 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
37588 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
37591 \begin_layout Description
37595 \begin_inset space ~
37600 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37601 source code, additionally all images used in the document
37602 will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable by the
37610 \begin_layout Description
37614 \begin_inset space ~
37623 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37624 source that is compilable with the program
37630 \begin_layout Description
37632 \begin_inset space ~
37636 \begin_inset space ~
37643 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37644 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation
37650 \begin_layout Description
37652 \begin_inset space ~
37655 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
37656 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
37658 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37662 \begin_inset space \space{}
37667 \begin_inset space ~
37671 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37675 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37679 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37683 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37686 represent the version number)
37689 \begin_layout Description
37691 \begin_inset space ~
37695 \begin_inset space ~
37698 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
37699 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
37700 to compile it (images, child documents, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
37704 \begin_layout Description
37705 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
37706 's internal XHTML engine
37709 \begin_layout Description
37711 \begin_inset space ~
37715 \begin_inset space ~
37719 \begin_inset space ~
37723 \begin_inset space ~
37726 XML Office Open XML file, to be opened with
37731 For the conversion the program
37740 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
37743 \begin_layout Description
37744 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
37749 \begin_layout Description
37751 \begin_inset space ~
37754 (Pandoc) OpenDocument file, to be opened with
37756 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
37759 For the conversion the program
37768 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
37771 \begin_layout Description
37773 \begin_inset space ~
37776 (tex4ht) OpenDocument file.
37777 For the conversion the program
37786 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
37789 \begin_layout Description
37791 \begin_inset space ~
37794 (cropped) the same as
37797 \begin_inset space ~
37802 but with cropped page margins
37805 \begin_layout Description
37809 \begin_inset space ~
37814 PDF-format using the program
37818 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
37821 \begin_layout Description
37825 \begin_inset space ~
37829 \begin_inset space ~
37837 \begin_inset space ~
37842 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
37843 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37847 \begin_inset space \space{}
37850 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermedia
37854 \begin_layout Description
37858 \begin_inset space ~
37863 PDF-format using the program
37865 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
37868 , produces PDF-files directly
37871 \begin_layout Description
37875 \begin_inset space ~
37880 PDF-format using the program
37884 , produces PDF-files directly
37887 \begin_layout Description
37891 \begin_inset space ~
37896 PDF-format using the program
37900 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
37903 \begin_layout Description
37907 \begin_inset space ~
37912 PDF-format using the program
37917 , produces PDF-files directly
37920 \begin_layout Description
37924 \begin_inset space ~
37932 \begin_layout Description
37936 \begin_inset space ~
37940 \begin_inset space ~
37945 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
37946 and then exported as text using the program
37951 \begin_layout Description
37956 PostScript format using the program
37964 options see section
37965 \begin_inset space ~
37969 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37971 reference "subsec:General-output"
37978 \begin_layout Description
37979 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37980 source and also code in the statistical programming
37994 it is possible to use
37998 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
38002 \begin_layout Standard
38003 If one of the menu entries
38010 \begin_inset space ~
38019 is missing, you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
38021 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
38023 \begin_inset space ~
38027 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38029 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
38034 \begin_inset Index idx
38037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38038 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
38047 \begin_layout Subsection
38051 \begin_layout Standard
38052 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
38053 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
38056 \begin_inset space ~
38060 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38062 reference "sec:Paths"
38067 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
38076 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
38077 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
38078 's preferences as described in section
38079 \begin_inset space ~
38083 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38085 reference "subsec:Converters"
38092 \begin_layout Subsection
38093 New and Close Window
38096 \begin_layout Standard
38097 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
38101 \begin_layout Subsection
38105 \begin_layout Standard
38106 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
38109 \begin_layout Section
38111 \begin_inset Index idx
38114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38123 \begin_layout Subsection
38127 \begin_layout Standard
38128 Described in section
38129 \begin_inset space ~
38133 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38135 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
38142 \begin_layout Subsection
38143 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
38146 \begin_layout Standard
38147 Described in section
38148 \begin_inset space ~
38152 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38154 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
38161 \begin_layout Subsection
38165 \begin_layout Standard
38166 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
38167 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
38170 \begin_layout Subsection
38174 \begin_layout Standard
38175 Selects the whole document.
38178 \begin_layout Subsection
38179 Find & Replace (Quick)
38182 \begin_layout Standard
38183 Described in section
38184 \begin_inset space ~
38188 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38190 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
38197 \begin_layout Subsection
38198 Find & Replace (Advanced)
38201 \begin_layout Standard
38202 Described in section
38203 \begin_inset space ~
38207 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38209 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
38216 \begin_layout Subsection
38217 Move Paragraph Up/Down
38220 \begin_layout Standard
38221 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
38225 \begin_layout Subsection
38229 \begin_layout Standard
38231 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595818
38232 This sub-menu provides several ways to customize the appearance of text
38237 \begin_layout Enumerate
38239 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595876
38240 Customize text properties by means of the
38246 Customized\SpecialChar ldots
38250 \change_deleted -712698321 1525595580
38252 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595580
38255 escribed in section
38256 \begin_inset space ~
38260 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38262 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
38267 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595582
38269 \change_deleted -712698321 1525595616
38271 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595617
38275 \begin_layout Enumerate
38277 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595704
38278 Change the casing of selected text (
38293 \begin_layout Enumerate
38295 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599421
38296 Select custom character styles if provided by the document class or a module
38297 (in the case of this document:
38314 \begin_inset space ~
38318 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38320 reference "subsec:Custom-Character-Styles"
38329 \begin_layout Subsection
38331 \begin_inset Index idx
38334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38335 Paragraph ! Settings
38343 \begin_layout Standard
38344 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
38345 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
38349 \begin_layout Standard
38350 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
38351 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
38357 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38358 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38360 \begin_inset space ~
38368 \begin_layout Subsection
38369 Table and Rows & Columns
38372 \begin_layout Standard
38373 These menus only appear if the cursor is inside a table.
38374 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
38375 of a cell and to set the alignment of the cell.
38378 \begin_layout Subsection
38382 \begin_layout Standard
38383 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside an inset.
38384 It will dissolve this inset.
38385 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
38389 \begin_layout Subsection
38393 \begin_layout Standard
38394 This menu is only active if the cursor is inside an inset or a formula.
38395 Here you can change the properties of the inset or the formula.
38398 \begin_layout Subsection
38399 Increase/Decrease List Depth
38402 \begin_layout Standard
38403 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
38405 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
38406 \begin_inset space ~
38410 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38412 reference "sec:Nesting"
38417 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38419 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
38426 \begin_layout Section
38428 \begin_inset Index idx
38431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38440 \begin_layout Standard
38441 At the bottom of the
38445 menu the opened documents are listed.
38448 \begin_layout Subsection
38449 Open/Close all Insets
38452 \begin_layout Standard
38453 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
38456 \begin_layout Subsection
38457 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
38460 \begin_layout Standard
38461 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
38464 \begin_layout Standard
38465 Math macros are described in the
38472 \begin_layout Subsection
38476 \begin_layout Standard
38477 Shows the outline window as described in sections
38478 \begin_inset space ~
38482 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38484 reference "sec:Navigating"
38489 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38491 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
38498 \begin_layout Subsection
38502 \begin_layout Standard
38503 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
38505 \begin_inset space ~
38509 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38511 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
38518 \begin_layout Subsection
38522 \begin_layout Standard
38523 Opens a window showing console messages.
38524 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
38526 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38529 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
38530 while \SpecialChar LaTeX
38531 is processing the document.
38534 \begin_layout Subsection
38536 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38538 name "subsec:Toolbars"
38543 \begin_inset Index idx
38546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38555 \begin_layout Standard
38556 In this menu entry you can set the icon size and the appearance of the different
38558 All toolbars and the
38561 \begin_inset space ~
38566 can be turned on and off.
38571 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
38583 \begin_inset space ~
38595 \begin_inset space ~
38600 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
38604 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
38611 \begin_layout Standard
38616 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
38620 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
38621 or when a certain feature is enabled.
38622 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
38623 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
38624 is inside a formula or table respectively.
38627 \begin_layout Standard
38629 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
38630 \begin_inset space ~
38634 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38636 reference "sec:Toolbars"
38643 \begin_layout Subsection
38647 \begin_layout Standard
38651 \begin_inset space ~
38655 \begin_inset space ~
38659 \begin_inset space ~
38663 \begin_inset space ~
38667 \begin_inset space ~
38671 \begin_inset space ~
38676 will split \SpecialChar LyX
38677 's main window vertically while
38680 \begin_inset space ~
38684 \begin_inset space ~
38688 \begin_inset space ~
38692 \begin_inset space ~
38696 \begin_inset space ~
38700 \begin_inset space ~
38705 will split it horizontally.
38706 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
38707 to view the same document, but at different positions.
38708 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
38709 three or more documents at the same time.
38710 To close a split view, use the menu
38713 \begin_inset space ~
38717 \begin_inset space ~
38725 \begin_layout Subsection
38729 \begin_layout Standard
38730 Closes a split view.
38733 \begin_layout Subsection
38737 \begin_layout Standard
38738 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
38739 so that you will see nothing but your text.
38740 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
38741 's main window fullscreen.
38742 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
38743 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
38746 \begin_layout Section
38748 \begin_inset Index idx
38751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38760 \begin_layout Subsection
38764 \begin_layout Standard
38765 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
38766 \begin_inset space ~
38770 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38772 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
38783 \begin_layout Subsection
38785 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38787 name "subsec:Special-Character"
38794 \begin_layout Standard
38795 Here you can insert the following characters:
38798 \begin_layout Description
38803 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
38806 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
38807 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38808 -packages you have installed.
38809 You can get a complete display by checking
38812 \begin_inset space ~
38818 \begin_inset Newline newline
38822 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
38825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38830 Not all characters will be visible in the
38834 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
38835 dialog (see section
38836 \begin_inset space ~
38840 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38842 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
38846 ) can display every character.
38854 \begin_layout Description
38855 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar ldots
38859 \begin_layout Description
38861 \begin_inset space ~
38865 \begin_inset space ~
38868 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
38869 \begin_inset space ~
38873 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38875 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
38882 \begin_layout Description
38884 \begin_inset space ~
38887 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
38890 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38891 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38897 \begin_layout Description
38899 \begin_inset space ~
38902 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
38905 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38906 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38912 \begin_layout Description
38914 \begin_inset space ~
38917 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar nobreakdash
38921 \begin_layout Description
38923 \begin_inset space ~
38926 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar breakableslash
38930 \begin_layout Description
38932 \begin_inset space ~
38935 Space Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when
38941 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
38947 \begin_layout Description
38949 \begin_inset space ~
38952 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar menuseparator
38956 \begin_layout Description
38958 \begin_inset space ~
38962 \begin_inset Index idx
38965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38972 \begin_inset Index idx
38975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38976 Language ! Phonetic symbols
38981 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
38982 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
38984 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38990 \begin_inset Index idx
38993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39001 \begin_inset Newline newline
39004 More information about this feature can be found in the
39010 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
39016 \begin_layout Description
39017 Logos Inserts the logos of the programs \SpecialChar LyX
39019 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
39020 and \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
39024 \begin_layout Subsection
39028 \begin_layout Standard
39029 Opens a submenu with the following options:
39032 \begin_layout Description
39033 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
39034 \begin_inset script superscript
39036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39045 \begin_layout Description
39046 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
39047 \begin_inset script subscript
39049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39058 \begin_layout Description
39060 \begin_inset space ~
39063 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
39064 \begin_inset space ~
39068 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39070 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
39077 \begin_layout Description
39079 \begin_inset space ~
39082 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
39083 \begin_inset space ~
39087 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39089 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
39096 \begin_layout Description
39098 \begin_inset space ~
39101 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
39102 \begin_inset space ~
39106 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39108 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
39115 \begin_layout Description
39117 \begin_inset space ~
39120 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
39122 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39126 \begin_inset space \space{}
39129 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
39130 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
39136 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39139 To insert a fraction use the command
39144 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
39148 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
39154 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39157 The visible space is hereby the character before the
39164 \begin_layout Description
39166 \begin_inset space ~
39169 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
39170 \begin_inset space ~
39174 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39176 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
39183 \begin_layout Description
39185 \begin_inset space ~
39188 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
39189 \begin_inset space ~
39193 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39195 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
39202 \begin_layout Description
39204 \begin_inset space ~
39207 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
39208 \begin_inset space ~
39212 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39214 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
39221 \begin_layout Description
39222 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
39223 \begin_inset space ~
39227 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39229 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
39236 \begin_layout Description
39238 \begin_inset space ~
39241 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
39242 \begin_inset space ~
39246 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39248 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
39255 \begin_layout Description
39257 \begin_inset space ~
39260 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
39261 \begin_inset space ~
39265 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39267 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
39274 \begin_layout Description
39276 \begin_inset space ~
39280 \begin_inset space ~
39283 Break Inserts a line break point (zero-width space character) that is invisible
39286 \begin_inset space ~
39290 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39292 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
39299 for a usage example.
39302 \begin_layout Description
39304 \begin_inset space ~
39308 \begin_inset space ~
39311 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
39312 \begin_inset space ~
39316 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39318 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
39325 \begin_layout Description
39327 \begin_inset space ~
39330 Break Inserts a forced line break that right justifies the remaining text
39331 as described in section
39332 \begin_inset space ~
39336 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39338 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
39345 \begin_layout Description
39347 \begin_inset space ~
39350 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
39351 \begin_inset space ~
39355 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39357 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
39364 \begin_layout Description
39366 \begin_inset space ~
39369 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
39370 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
39372 \begin_inset space ~
39376 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39378 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
39385 \begin_layout Description
39387 \begin_inset space ~
39390 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
39391 \begin_inset space ~
39395 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39397 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
39404 \begin_layout Description
39406 \begin_inset space ~
39410 \begin_inset space ~
39413 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
39414 \begin_inset space ~
39418 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39420 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
39427 \begin_layout Subsection
39431 \begin_layout Standard
39432 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
39436 \begin_inset space ~
39457 are described in section
39458 \begin_inset space ~
39462 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39464 reference "sec:toc"
39473 is described in section
39474 \begin_inset space ~
39478 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39480 reference "sec:Index"
39488 is described in section
39489 \begin_inset space ~
39493 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39495 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
39501 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
39504 is described in section
39505 \begin_inset space ~
39509 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39511 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
39518 \begin_layout Subsection
39522 \begin_layout Standard
39523 To insert floats, as described in section
39524 \begin_inset space ~
39528 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39530 reference "sec:Floats"
39534 and in detail the chapter
39541 \begin_inset space ~
39549 \begin_layout Subsection
39553 \begin_layout Standard
39554 To insert notes, described in section
39555 \begin_inset space ~
39559 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39561 reference "sec:Notes"
39568 \begin_layout Subsection
39572 \begin_layout Standard
39573 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
39575 Branches are described in section
39576 \begin_inset space ~
39580 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39582 reference "sec:Branches"
39589 \begin_layout Subsection
39593 \begin_layout Standard
39594 Inserts document class-specific insets.
39595 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
39597 An example is the document class
39598 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39602 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39605 with three custom insets.
39608 Flex insets and InsetLayout
39612 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
39618 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
39621 \begin_layout Subsection
39623 \begin_inset Index idx
39626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39635 \begin_layout Standard
39636 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
39638 For more information see chapter
39640 External Document Parts
39643 \begin_inset space ~
39649 \begin_layout Subsection
39651 \begin_inset Index idx
39654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39663 \begin_layout Standard
39664 Inserts a box in a certain style.
39665 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
39672 \begin_inset space ~
39680 \begin_layout Subsection
39684 \begin_layout Standard
39689 dialog as described in section
39690 \begin_inset space ~
39694 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39696 reference "sec:Bibliography"
39703 \begin_layout Subsection
39707 \begin_layout Standard
39712 as described in section
39713 \begin_inset space ~
39717 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39719 reference "sec:Cross-References"
39726 \begin_layout Subsection
39730 \begin_layout Standard
39735 as described in section
39736 \begin_inset space ~
39740 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39742 reference "sec:Cross-References"
39749 \begin_layout Subsection
39751 \begin_inset Index idx
39754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39761 \begin_inset Index idx
39764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39765 Tables ! Multi-page ! Caption
39773 \begin_layout Standard
39774 Inserts a caption in a float or multi-page table.
39775 Floats are described in section
39776 \begin_inset space ~
39780 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39782 reference "sec:Floats"
39786 ; captions in multi-page tables are described in the section
39788 Multi-page Captions
39793 \begin_inset space ~
39801 \begin_layout Subsection
39805 \begin_layout Standard
39806 Inserts an index entry as described in section
39807 \begin_inset space ~
39811 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39813 reference "sec:Index"
39820 \begin_layout Subsection
39824 \begin_layout Standard
39825 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
39826 \begin_inset space ~
39830 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39832 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
39839 \begin_layout Subsection
39843 \begin_layout Standard
39844 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
39845 Tables are described in section
39846 \begin_inset space ~
39850 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39852 reference "sec:Tables"
39856 and in detail in the chapter
39863 \begin_inset space ~
39871 \begin_layout Subsection
39875 \begin_layout Standard
39881 Graphics are described in section
39882 \begin_inset space ~
39886 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39888 reference "sec:Graphics"
39895 \begin_layout Subsection
39899 \begin_layout Standard
39900 Inserts a URL as described in section
39901 \begin_inset space ~
39905 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39907 reference "subsec:URLs"
39914 \begin_layout Subsection
39918 \begin_layout Standard
39919 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
39920 \begin_inset space ~
39924 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39926 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
39933 \begin_layout Subsection
39937 \begin_layout Standard
39938 Inserts a footnote as described in section
39939 \begin_inset space ~
39943 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39945 reference "sec:Footnotes"
39952 \begin_layout Subsection
39956 \begin_layout Standard
39957 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
39958 \begin_inset space ~
39962 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39964 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
39971 \begin_layout Subsection
39974 Separate <Name> (Above/Below)
39977 \begin_layout Standard
39978 These menu items are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive
39979 environments of the same type.
39981 \begin_inset space ~
39985 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39987 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
39991 for an explanation.
39994 \begin_layout Subsection
39998 \begin_layout Standard
39999 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
40000 title or caption of a float.
40001 Inserts a short title as described in section
40002 \begin_inset space ~
40006 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40008 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
40015 \begin_layout Subsection
40020 \begin_layout Standard
40021 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
40022 Code box as described in section
40023 \begin_inset space ~
40027 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40029 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
40036 \begin_layout Subsection
40038 \begin_inset Index idx
40041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40050 \begin_layout Standard
40051 Inserts a program listings box.
40052 Program listings are explained in the chapter
40054 Program Code Listings
40059 \begin_inset space ~
40067 \begin_layout Subsection
40071 \begin_layout Standard
40072 Inserts the actual date.
40073 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
40078 \begin_layout Subsection
40082 \begin_layout Standard
40083 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
40084 \begin_inset space ~
40088 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40090 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
40097 \begin_layout Section
40099 \begin_inset Index idx
40102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40111 \begin_layout Standard
40112 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
40113 \begin_inset space ~
40116 of the current document.
40117 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
40120 \begin_layout Subsection
40124 \begin_layout Standard
40125 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
40126 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
40127 to jump, for example, between section
40128 \begin_inset space ~
40132 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
40133 \begin_inset space ~
40136 2.5 and use the submenu
40139 \begin_inset space ~
40143 \begin_inset space ~
40150 \begin_inset space ~
40156 \begin_inset space ~
40160 \begin_inset space ~
40166 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
40170 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
40176 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
40179 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
40182 \begin_layout Standard
40183 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
40187 \begin_inset space ~
40192 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
40195 \begin_inset space ~
40200 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
40203 \begin_layout Subsection
40204 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
40207 \begin_layout Standard
40208 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
40212 \begin_layout Subsection
40216 \begin_layout Standard
40217 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
40218 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
40219 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
40223 \begin_inset space ~
40227 \begin_inset space ~
40235 \begin_layout Subsection
40239 \begin_layout Standard
40240 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
40243 The \SpecialChar LyX
40244 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
40246 \begin_inset space ~
40254 \begin_inset space ~
40259 manual for a detailed description.
40262 \begin_layout Section
40264 \begin_inset Index idx
40267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40276 \begin_layout Subsection
40280 \begin_layout Standard
40281 Change Tracking is described in section
40282 \begin_inset space ~
40286 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40288 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
40295 \begin_layout Subsection
40303 \begin_layout Standard
40304 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
40305 by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be enabled.
40306 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40308 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
40309 to the clipboard or update the view.
40310 \begin_inset Newline newline
40313 With the help of the logfile, experts can find reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
40317 \begin_layout Standard
40320 Open Containing Directory
40322 one can open \SpecialChar LyX
40323 's temporary folder for the document.
40324 This folder contains all converted and created files to generate the output.
40325 Some of these files might be of interest for experts to solve problems
40326 or for writers who need to supply intermediate files.
40327 For example some journals require to send the
40331 file (a text file with the used Bib\SpecialChar TeX
40335 \begin_layout Subsection
40336 Start Appendix Here
40339 \begin_layout Standard
40340 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
40341 as described in section
40342 \begin_inset space ~
40346 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40348 reference "sec:Appendices"
40355 \begin_layout Subsection
40357 \begin_inset space ~
40363 \begin_layout Standard
40364 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
40365 default output format for the document (menu
40367 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40368 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40369 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
40371 \begin_inset space ~
40375 \begin_inset space ~
40381 \begin_inset space ~
40385 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40387 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
40391 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
40394 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40395 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40397 \begin_inset space ~
40400 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
40402 \begin_inset space ~
40405 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
40407 \begin_inset space ~
40411 \begin_inset space ~
40417 \begin_inset space ~
40421 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40423 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40427 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
40428 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
40430 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40431 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40433 \begin_inset space ~
40436 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
40438 \begin_inset space ~
40441 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
40445 \begin_inset space ~
40449 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40451 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40456 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
40457 when it is first configured.
40458 The default output format is
40461 \begin_inset space ~
40469 \begin_layout Subsection
40470 View (Other Formats)
40473 \begin_layout Standard
40474 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
40475 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
40476 actual document with an external program.
40477 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
40478 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40479 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
40481 All possible formats are listed in section
40482 \begin_inset space ~
40486 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40488 reference "subsec:Export"
40493 You should at least see the menu entry
40498 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40500 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
40502 \begin_inset space ~
40506 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40508 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
40513 \begin_inset Index idx
40516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40517 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
40526 \begin_layout Standard
40527 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
40528 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
40530 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40531 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40533 \begin_inset space ~
40536 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
40538 \begin_inset space ~
40541 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
40545 \begin_inset space ~
40549 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40551 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40556 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
40557 when it is first configured.
40560 \begin_layout Subsection
40562 \begin_inset space ~
40568 \begin_layout Standard
40569 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
40570 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
40573 \begin_layout Subsection
40574 Update (Other Formats)
40577 \begin_layout Standard
40578 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
40579 your document without opening a new viewer window.
40582 \begin_layout Subsection
40583 View Master Document
40586 \begin_layout Standard
40587 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
40589 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40593 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40603 \begin_inset space ~
40608 manual for more information on this topic).
40609 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
40610 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
40614 \begin_inset space ~
40618 \begin_inset space ~
40623 generates the output of the whole book, while
40627 will just output the chapter alone.
40630 \begin_layout Standard
40631 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
40632 in the document settings (menu
40634 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40635 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40636 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
40638 \begin_inset space ~
40642 \begin_inset space ~
40648 \begin_inset space ~
40652 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40654 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
40658 ) or in the preferences (menu
40660 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40661 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40663 \begin_inset space ~
40666 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
40668 \begin_inset space ~
40671 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
40673 \begin_inset space ~
40677 \begin_inset space ~
40683 \begin_inset space ~
40687 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40689 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40696 \begin_layout Subsection
40697 Update Master Document
40700 \begin_layout Standard
40701 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
40703 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40707 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40717 \begin_inset space ~
40722 manual for more information on this topic).
40723 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
40724 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
40727 \begin_layout Standard
40728 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
40729 in the document settings (menu
40731 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40732 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40733 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
40735 \begin_inset space ~
40739 \begin_inset space ~
40745 \begin_inset space ~
40749 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40751 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
40755 ) or in the preferences (menu
40757 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40758 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40760 \begin_inset space ~
40763 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
40765 \begin_inset space ~
40768 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
40770 \begin_inset space ~
40774 \begin_inset space ~
40780 \begin_inset space ~
40784 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40786 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40793 \begin_layout Subsection
40795 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40797 name "subsec:Compressed"
40804 \begin_layout Standard
40805 Un/compresses the current document.
40806 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable
40807 compression (see the
40809 Additional Features
40811 manual for details).
40814 \begin_layout Subsection
40818 \begin_layout Standard
40819 Toggles the read-only state for the document.
40822 \begin_layout Subsection
40826 \begin_layout Standard
40827 The document settings are described in appendix
40828 \begin_inset space ~
40832 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40834 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
40841 \begin_layout Section
40843 \begin_inset Index idx
40846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40855 \begin_layout Subsection
40859 \begin_layout Standard
40860 Spell checking is explained in section
40861 \begin_inset space ~
40865 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40867 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
40874 \begin_layout Subsection
40878 \begin_layout Standard
40879 The thesaurus is described in section
40880 \begin_inset space ~
40884 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40886 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
40893 \begin_layout Subsection
40895 \begin_inset Index idx
40898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40905 \begin_inset Index idx
40908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40917 \begin_layout Standard
40918 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
40919 the highlighted document part.
40922 \begin_layout Subsection
40928 \begin_inset Index idx
40931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40932 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
40941 \begin_layout Standard
40942 Generates with the help of the program
40944 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
40947 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
40948 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
40949 This feature is not available on Windows.
40952 \begin_layout Subsection
40958 \begin_inset Index idx
40961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40971 \begin_layout Standard
40972 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40977 \begin_inset space ~
40982 to see the full filename paths.
40985 \begin_layout Subsection
40987 \begin_inset Index idx
40990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40999 \begin_layout Standard
41000 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
41001 files as described in section
41002 \begin_inset space ~
41006 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41008 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
41015 \begin_layout Subsection
41017 \begin_inset Index idx
41020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41033 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
41038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41051 \begin_inset Index idx
41054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41055 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
41064 \begin_layout Standard
41065 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
41066 ; that is, \SpecialChar LyX
41067 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
41068 -packages and programs it needs; see
41070 \begin_inset space ~
41074 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41076 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
41083 \begin_layout Subsection
41087 \begin_layout Standard
41092 dialog as described in detail in appendix
41093 \begin_inset space ~
41097 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41099 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
41106 \begin_layout Section
41108 \begin_inset Index idx
41111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41120 \begin_layout Standard
41121 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
41122 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
41124 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
41128 \begin_layout Standard
41132 \begin_inset space ~
41137 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
41138 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41139 packages and classes found
41140 by \SpecialChar LyX
41142 \begin_inset space ~
41146 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41148 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
41155 \begin_layout Standard
41159 \begin_inset space ~
41164 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
41169 \begin_layout Section
41171 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41173 name "sec:Toolbars"
41180 \begin_layout Standard
41181 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
41182 \begin_inset space ~
41186 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41188 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
41195 \begin_layout Standard
41196 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
41197 This is described in the
41199 Additional Features
41204 \begin_layout Subsection
41206 \begin_inset Index idx
41209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41218 \begin_layout Standard
41219 \begin_inset Graphics
41220 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
41228 \begin_layout Standard
41229 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
41235 \begin_layout Standard
41236 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
41241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41253 \begin_inset Note Note
41256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41257 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
41262 manual for more information.
41270 \begin_layout Standard
41271 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
41277 \begin_layout Standard
41278 \begin_inset Tabular
41279 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
41280 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
41281 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
41282 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
41284 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41288 \begin_inset Graphics
41289 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
41299 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41303 pull-down box for the environments
41316 \begin_layout Standard
41317 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
41323 \begin_layout Standard
41325 \begin_inset Tabular
41326 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="22" columns="2">
41327 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
41328 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
41329 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
41330 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41331 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41347 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41353 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
41360 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41361 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41377 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41383 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
41390 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41391 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41407 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41413 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
41420 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41421 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41429 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
41437 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41443 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41450 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41451 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41459 arg "spelling-continuously"
41467 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41471 Spellcheck continuously
41477 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41478 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41494 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41500 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41507 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41508 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41524 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41530 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41537 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41538 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41554 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41560 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41567 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41568 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41584 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41590 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41597 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41598 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41614 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41620 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41627 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41628 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41636 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
41644 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41650 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41652 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41656 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41660 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41669 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41670 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41676 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
41684 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41690 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41692 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41696 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41700 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41709 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41710 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41718 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
41726 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41732 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
41733 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
41740 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41741 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41757 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41761 Emphasize text, function of the
41763 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41765 \begin_inset space ~
41768 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
41777 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41778 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41794 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41798 Set text to noun style, function of the
41800 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41802 \begin_inset space ~
41805 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
41814 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41815 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41823 arg "textstyle-apply"
41831 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41835 Format text using the current settings in the
41837 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41839 \begin_inset space ~
41842 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
41851 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41852 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41868 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41874 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41875 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
41877 \begin_inset space ~
41886 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41887 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41895 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
41903 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41909 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41916 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41917 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41923 arg "tabular-insert"
41931 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41937 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41944 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41945 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41953 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
41961 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41965 Toggle outline window on/off,
41967 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
41974 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41975 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41983 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
41991 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41995 Toggle math toolbar on/off
42001 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42002 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42010 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
42018 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42022 Toggle table toolbar on/off
42035 \begin_layout Subsection
42037 \begin_inset Index idx
42040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42049 \begin_layout Standard
42050 \begin_inset Graphics
42051 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
42059 \begin_layout Standard
42060 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
42066 \begin_layout Standard
42067 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
42071 \begin_layout Standard
42072 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
42078 \begin_layout Standard
42079 \begin_inset Tabular
42080 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="25" columns="2">
42081 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
42082 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
42083 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
42084 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42085 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42101 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42111 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42112 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42120 arg "layout Enumerate"
42128 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42138 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42139 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42147 arg "layout Itemize"
42155 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42165 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42166 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42182 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42192 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42193 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42201 arg "layout Description"
42209 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42219 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42220 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42228 arg "depth-increment"
42236 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42242 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42244 \begin_inset space ~
42248 \begin_inset space ~
42257 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42258 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42266 arg "depth-decrement"
42274 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42280 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42282 \begin_inset space ~
42286 \begin_inset space ~
42295 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42296 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42304 arg "float-insert figure"
42312 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42318 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42319 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
42326 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42327 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42335 arg "float-insert table"
42343 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42349 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42350 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
42357 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42358 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42374 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42380 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42387 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42388 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42396 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
42404 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42410 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42417 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42418 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42426 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
42434 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42440 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42447 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42448 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42464 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42470 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42472 \begin_inset space ~
42481 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42482 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42490 arg "nomencl-insert"
42498 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42504 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42506 \begin_inset space ~
42515 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42516 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42524 arg "footnote-insert"
42532 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42538 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42545 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42546 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42554 arg "marginalnote-insert"
42562 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42568 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42570 \begin_inset space ~
42579 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42580 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42596 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42602 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42603 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
42605 \begin_inset space ~
42614 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42615 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42623 arg "box-insert Frameless"
42631 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42637 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42644 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42645 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42661 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42667 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42674 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42675 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42691 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42697 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42699 \begin_inset space ~
42708 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42709 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42717 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
42725 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42731 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42732 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
42739 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42740 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42748 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
42756 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42762 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42763 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
42765 \begin_inset space ~
42774 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42775 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42783 arg "dialog-show character"
42791 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42797 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42799 \begin_inset space ~
42802 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
42809 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42810 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42818 arg "layout-paragraph"
42826 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42832 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42834 \begin_inset space ~
42843 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42844 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42852 arg "thesaurus-entry"
42860 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42866 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42880 \begin_layout Subsection
42881 View/Update Toolbar
42882 \begin_inset Index idx
42885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42886 Toolbar ! View / Update
42894 \begin_layout Standard
42895 \begin_inset Graphics
42896 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
42903 \begin_layout Standard
42904 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
42910 \begin_layout Standard
42911 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
42915 \begin_layout Standard
42916 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
42922 \begin_layout Standard
42923 \begin_inset Tabular
42924 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
42925 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
42926 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
42927 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
42928 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42929 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42945 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42951 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42958 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42959 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42967 arg "buffer-update"
42975 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42981 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42988 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42989 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42997 arg "master-buffer-view"
43005 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43011 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43013 \begin_inset space ~
43022 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43023 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43031 arg "master-buffer-update"
43039 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43045 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43047 \begin_inset space ~
43051 \begin_inset space ~
43060 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43061 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43069 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
43077 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43083 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43084 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
43085 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
43086 Synchronize with Output
43092 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43093 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43109 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43115 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43116 View (Other Formats)
43122 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43123 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43129 arg "update-others"
43137 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43143 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43144 Update (Other Formats)
43157 \begin_layout Standard
43158 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
43162 \begin_layout Subsection
43166 \begin_layout Standard
43167 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
43168 \begin_inset space ~
43172 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43174 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
43178 , the table toolbar
43179 \begin_inset Index idx
43182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43191 \begin_inset space ~
43196 manual and the math macro toolbar
43197 \begin_inset Index idx
43200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43213 \begin_layout Chapter
43214 The Document Settings
43215 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43217 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
43222 \begin_inset Index idx
43225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43226 Document ! Settings
43234 \begin_layout Standard
43238 \begin_inset space ~
43243 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
43244 is called with the menu
43246 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43250 You can save your document settings as default with the
43252 Save as Document Defaults
43254 button in any dialog.
43255 This will create a template named
43259 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
43260 when you create a new document without
43264 \begin_layout Standard
43269 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
43270 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
43273 \begin_layout Standard
43274 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
43275 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
43276 to find the one you are looking for.
43277 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
43278 the submenus of the dialog.
43280 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43284 \begin_inset space \space{}
43288 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43292 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43295 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
43296 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
43297 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
43300 \begin_layout Section
43304 \begin_layout Standard
43305 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
43307 Document classes are described in section
43308 \begin_inset space ~
43312 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43314 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
43322 \begin_layout Standard
43326 \begin_inset space ~
43331 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
43336 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
43337 as a layout for a document class.
43338 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
43340 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
43349 \begin_layout Standard
43350 Some classes use special class options by default.
43351 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
43355 and you can decide to use them or not.
43356 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
43357 recommended you leave them untouched.
43362 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
43363 's graphics, color and page layout packages.
43368 , the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43370 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
43375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43376 When you want to use one of the following drivers
43377 \begin_inset Newline newline
43382 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
43385 \begin_inset Newline newline
43388 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
43389 distribution, see section
43394 \begin_inset CommandInset href
43396 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
43409 \begin_layout Standard
43414 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
43415 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
43416 in the background if the child document
43417 is opened without its master.
43418 This way child documents are always compilable.
43419 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
43426 \begin_inset space ~
43434 \begin_layout Standard
43435 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43446 \begin_inset Index idx
43449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43451 packages ! prettyref
43457 \begin_inset Index idx
43460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43462 packages ! refstyle
43467 for cross-references, see section
43468 \begin_inset space ~
43472 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43474 reference "sec:Cross-References"
43481 \begin_layout Section
43485 \begin_layout Standard
43486 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
43487 Please refer to the section
43490 \begin_inset space ~
43498 \begin_inset space ~
43503 manual for details.
43506 \begin_layout Section
43510 \begin_layout Standard
43511 Modules are explained in section
43512 \begin_inset space ~
43516 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43518 reference "subsec:Modules"
43525 \begin_layout Section
43529 \begin_layout Standard
43531 \begin_inset space ~
43535 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43537 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
43544 \begin_layout Section
43548 \begin_layout Standard
43549 The document font settings are described in section
43550 \begin_inset space ~
43554 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43556 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
43563 \begin_layout Section
43567 \begin_layout Standard
43568 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
43580 \begin_inset space ~
43585 and whether it should be a
43588 \begin_inset space ~
43593 can also be specified here.
43596 \begin_layout Standard
43597 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
43598 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
43599 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
43601 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
43604 \begin_layout Standard
43607 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
43610 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
43611 justifies the text on screen.
43612 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
43616 \begin_layout Section
43620 \begin_layout Standard
43621 This dialog is described in sections
43622 \begin_inset space ~
43626 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43628 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
43633 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43635 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
43642 \begin_layout Section
43646 \begin_layout Standard
43647 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
43648 \begin_inset space ~
43652 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43654 reference "subsec:Margins"
43661 \begin_layout Section
43663 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43665 name "sec:Language-encodings"
43670 \begin_inset Index idx
43673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43674 Language ! Encoding
43682 \begin_layout Standard
43683 The document language and quote styles are set here.
43684 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
43685 (the \SpecialChar LyX
43687 is always encoded in utf8).
43688 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
43689 be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
43690 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
43691 -command is not known for
43692 a particular character).
43695 \begin_layout Standard
43696 If you use the option
43701 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
43702 If the document contains text in more than one language you may get more
43703 than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43705 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
43706 exactly one encoding.
43707 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
43710 \begin_layout Standard
43712 also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
43713 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
43714 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
43715 installation supports Unicode), choose
43716 one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
43717 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
43718 is quite incomplete, so
43719 it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
43724 (when \SpecialChar LyX
43725 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
43726 -commands), but does not work with a fixed
43727 utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
43728 -commands is not used, because all
43729 Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
43730 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
43731 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
43732 , two new alternative engines
43733 to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
43735 Both engines support Unicode natively.
43737 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
43740 \begin_inset space ~
43748 \begin_inset space ~
43756 \begin_inset space ~
43762 \begin_inset space ~
43766 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43768 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
43773 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
43777 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
43780 \begin_layout Standard
43784 \begin_inset space ~
43789 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43790 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
43792 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43796 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43800 The possible settings are:
43803 \begin_layout Description
43804 Default uses the language package that is selected in
43806 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43807 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
43811 \begin_inset space ~
43815 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43817 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
43824 \begin_layout Description
43825 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
43826 format you will use.
43827 In many cases this will be
43832 \begin_inset Index idx
43835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43843 If the newer package
43848 \begin_inset Index idx
43851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43853 packages ! polyglossia
43858 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
43859 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
43860 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
43862 this package will be used instead of
43869 \begin_layout Description
43871 \begin_inset space ~
43882 would be more appropriate.
43885 \begin_layout Description
43886 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
43887 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
43891 (for German texts), type in
43894 \begin_inset Newline newline
43899 usepackage{ngerman}
43902 \begin_layout Description
43903 None will not use a language package.
43904 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
43907 \begin_layout Standard
43908 Here is a list with the important encodings:
43911 \begin_layout Description
43913 \begin_inset space ~
43917 \begin_inset space ~
43921 \begin_inset space ~
43928 , but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43934 \begin_inset Index idx
43937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43939 packages ! inputenc
43945 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
43946 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
43947 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
43951 \begin_layout Description
43952 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
43954 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
43955 commands, which may result in a big
43956 file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
43957 -commands are needed.
43960 \begin_layout Description
43962 \begin_inset space ~
43966 \begin_inset space ~
43969 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
43972 \begin_layout Description
43974 \begin_inset space ~
43978 \begin_inset space ~
43981 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
43984 \begin_layout Description
43986 \begin_inset space ~
43989 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
43992 \begin_layout Description
43994 \begin_inset space ~
43998 \begin_inset space ~
44001 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
44002 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
44005 \begin_layout Description
44007 \begin_inset space ~
44011 \begin_inset space ~
44014 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
44018 \begin_layout Description
44020 \begin_inset space ~
44024 \begin_inset space ~
44027 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
44028 ISO-8859-13 encoding
44031 \begin_layout Description
44033 \begin_inset space ~
44037 \begin_inset space ~
44041 \begin_inset space ~
44044 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
44045 \begin_inset space ~
44051 \begin_layout Description
44053 \begin_inset space ~
44057 \begin_inset space ~
44061 \begin_inset space ~
44064 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
44065 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
44068 \begin_layout Description
44070 \begin_inset space ~
44074 \begin_inset space ~
44077 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
44078 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
44079 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
44080 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
44081 \begin_inset space ~
44085 \begin_inset space ~
44091 \begin_layout Description
44093 \begin_inset space ~
44097 \begin_inset space ~
44100 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
44101 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
44102 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
44104 should try to use the encoding Unicode
44105 \begin_inset space ~
44109 \begin_inset space ~
44115 \begin_layout Description
44117 \begin_inset space ~
44121 \begin_inset space ~
44124 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
44127 \begin_layout Description
44129 \begin_inset space ~
44133 \begin_inset space ~
44136 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
44139 \begin_layout Description
44141 \begin_inset space ~
44145 \begin_inset space ~
44148 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
44151 \begin_layout Description
44153 \begin_inset space ~
44156 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
44159 \begin_layout Description
44161 \begin_inset space ~
44164 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
44167 \begin_layout Description
44169 \begin_inset space ~
44173 \begin_inset space ~
44176 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
44179 \begin_layout Description
44181 \begin_inset space ~
44185 \begin_inset space ~
44191 \begin_layout Description
44193 \begin_inset space ~
44197 \begin_inset space ~
44200 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
44203 \begin_layout Description
44205 \begin_inset space ~
44209 \begin_inset space ~
44215 \begin_layout Description
44217 \begin_inset space ~
44221 \begin_inset space ~
44224 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44230 \begin_inset Index idx
44233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44240 , when using this, set the document language to
44245 \begin_layout Description
44247 \begin_inset space ~
44251 \begin_inset space ~
44254 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44259 , when using this, set the document language to
44262 \begin_inset space ~
44268 \begin_layout Description
44270 \begin_inset space ~
44274 \begin_inset space ~
44277 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44283 \begin_inset Index idx
44286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44288 packages ! japanese
44293 , when using this, set the document language to
44298 \begin_layout Description
44300 \begin_inset space ~
44304 \begin_inset space ~
44307 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44312 , when using this, set the document language to
44317 \begin_layout Description
44319 \begin_inset space ~
44323 \begin_inset space ~
44326 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44331 , when using this, set the document language to
44336 \begin_layout Description
44338 \begin_inset space ~
44341 (EUC-KR) for Korean
44344 \begin_layout Description
44346 \begin_inset space ~
44350 \begin_inset space ~
44354 \begin_inset space ~
44357 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
44360 \begin_layout Description
44362 \begin_inset space ~
44366 \begin_inset space ~
44370 \begin_inset space ~
44373 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
44374 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
44375 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
44378 \begin_layout Description
44380 \begin_inset space ~
44384 \begin_inset space ~
44390 \begin_layout Description
44392 \begin_inset space ~
44396 \begin_inset space ~
44399 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
44400 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
44403 \begin_layout Description
44405 \begin_inset space ~
44409 \begin_inset space ~
44412 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44418 \begin_inset Index idx
44421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44428 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
44431 \begin_layout Description
44433 \begin_inset space ~
44441 \begin_inset space ~
44444 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
44451 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
44454 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44461 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
44462 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
44464 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
44467 \begin_layout Description
44469 \begin_inset space ~
44473 \begin_inset space ~
44476 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44482 \begin_inset Index idx
44485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44492 (comprehensive, including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
44495 \begin_layout Description
44497 \begin_inset space ~
44500 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44506 \begin_inset Index idx
44509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44511 packages ! inputenc
44517 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
44521 \begin_layout Description
44523 \begin_inset space ~
44527 \begin_inset space ~
44531 \begin_inset space ~
44534 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
44535 \begin_inset space ~
44541 \begin_layout Description
44543 \begin_inset space ~
44547 \begin_inset space ~
44551 \begin_inset space ~
44554 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
44555 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
44556 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
44560 \begin_layout Description
44562 \begin_inset space ~
44566 \begin_inset space ~
44570 \begin_inset space ~
44573 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
44574 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
44577 \begin_layout Section
44579 \begin_inset Index idx
44582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44589 \begin_inset Index idx
44592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44599 \begin_inset Index idx
44602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44603 Color ! Shaded boxes
44609 \begin_inset Index idx
44612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44613 Color ! Greyed-out notes
44621 \begin_layout Standard
44622 Here you can alter the font color for the
44626 (default: black), for
44629 \begin_inset space ~
44634 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
44638 (default: white) and for
44641 \begin_inset space ~
44651 sets the color back to the default.
44654 \begin_layout Standard
44655 Clicking any button showing
44663 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
44664 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
44665 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
44666 later more quickly.
44669 \begin_layout Standard
44670 Note, if you change the
44673 \begin_inset space ~
44678 font color and use the option
44681 \begin_inset space ~
44686 in the document settings under
44689 \begin_inset space ~
44694 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
44695 \begin_inset space ~
44699 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44701 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
44708 \begin_layout Standard
44709 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
44715 \begin_layout Standard
44719 \begin_inset space ~
44728 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
44731 \begin_inset space ~
44734 Code after a forced page break:
44737 \begin_layout Itemize
44738 For the page color:
44739 \begin_inset Newline newline
44746 pagecolor{color name}
44749 \begin_layout Itemize
44750 For the text color:
44751 \begin_inset Newline newline
44761 \begin_layout Standard
44762 You are restricted to one of
44798 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
44805 \begin_inset space ~
44811 \begin_inset Newline newline
44814 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
44815 names to refer to them:
44818 \begin_layout Itemize
44824 \begin_inset Newline newline
44829 page_backgroundcolor
44832 \begin_layout Itemize
44836 \begin_inset space ~
44842 \begin_inset Newline newline
44850 \begin_layout Itemize
44854 \begin_inset space ~
44860 \begin_inset Newline newline
44868 \begin_layout Itemize
44872 \begin_inset space ~
44878 \begin_inset Newline newline
44886 \begin_layout Standard
44887 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
44890 \begin_inset space ~
44898 \begin_inset space ~
44906 \begin_layout Section
44910 \begin_layout Standard
44911 Here you can adjust the
44915 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
44919 as described in section
44920 \begin_inset space ~
44924 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44926 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
44933 \begin_layout Section
44937 \begin_layout Standard
44938 Here you can specify if a specific citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44944 \begin_inset Index idx
44947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44949 packages ! biblatex
44959 \begin_inset Index idx
44962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44974 \begin_inset Index idx
44977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44985 If you use Bib\SpecialChar TeX
44988 Sectioned bibliography
44990 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44996 \begin_inset Index idx
44999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45001 packages ! bibtopic
45011 , you can select the style files and specify further options.
45012 Finally, you can select a document-specific
45016 for the generation of the bibliography.
45017 For a further description of these possibilities see section
45018 \begin_inset space ~
45022 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45024 reference "sec:Bibliography"
45031 \begin_layout Section
45035 \begin_layout Standard
45036 Here you can define the
45040 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
45042 \begin_inset space ~
45046 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45048 reference "sec:Index"
45055 \begin_layout Section
45059 \begin_layout Standard
45060 The PDF properties are explained in section
45061 \begin_inset space ~
45065 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45067 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
45074 \begin_layout Section
45078 \begin_layout Standard
45079 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
45080 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45086 \begin_inset Index idx
45089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45101 \begin_inset Index idx
45104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45116 \begin_inset Index idx
45119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45131 \begin_inset Index idx
45134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45146 \begin_inset Index idx
45149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45151 packages ! mathdots
45161 \begin_inset Index idx
45164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45166 packages ! mathtools
45176 \begin_inset Index idx
45179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45191 \begin_inset Index idx
45194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45196 packages ! stackrel
45206 \begin_inset Index idx
45209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45211 packages ! stmaryrd
45221 \begin_inset Index idx
45224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45226 packages ! undertilde
45231 , or to use them automatically when they are needed.
45234 \begin_layout Description
45235 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
45236 -errors in formulas,
45237 ensure that you have this enabled.
45240 \begin_layout Description
45241 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
45242 letters, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
45243 -errors in formulas, ensure that you have this
45247 \begin_layout Description
45248 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
45251 \begin_inset space ~
45263 \begin_layout Description
45264 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
45267 \begin_inset space ~
45279 \begin_layout Description
45280 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
45291 \begin_layout Description
45292 mathtools is used for the math commands
45328 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
45335 \begin_layout Description
45336 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
45338 Chemical Symbols and Equations
45347 \begin_layout Description
45348 stackrel is used for the math command
45365 \begin_layout Description
45366 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
45369 \begin_layout Description
45370 undertilde is used for the math command
45378 Accents for one Character
45387 \begin_layout Section
45391 \begin_layout Standard
45392 The float placement options are described in the section
45395 \begin_inset space ~
45403 \begin_inset space ~
45411 \begin_layout Section
45415 \begin_layout Standard
45416 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
45418 Program Code Listings
45423 \begin_inset space ~
45431 \begin_layout Section
45435 \begin_layout Standard
45436 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
45444 set to be used and set the
45449 The itemize environment is described in section
45450 \begin_inset space ~
45454 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45456 reference "sec:Itemize"
45463 \begin_layout Standard
45464 You can furthermore specify a
45467 \begin_inset space ~
45472 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45473 command of the desired character.
45474 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
45481 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
45483 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45487 \begin_inset space \space{}
45491 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
45501 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
45502 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
45505 \begin_layout Standard
45506 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
45509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45514 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
45515 -packages in the preamble (menu
45518 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45519 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
45522 \begin_inset space ~
45528 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
45532 usepackage{textcomp}
45535 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
45539 usepackage{amssymb}
45549 \begin_layout Section
45553 \begin_layout Standard
45554 Branches are described in section
45555 \begin_inset space ~
45559 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45561 reference "sec:Branches"
45568 \begin_layout Section
45570 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45572 name "sec:Doc-Formats"
45579 \begin_layout Standard
45580 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
45583 \begin_layout Description
45585 \begin_inset space ~
45589 \begin_inset space ~
45592 Format: The format that is used when you enter
45593 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45597 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45601 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45605 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45609 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45612 View Master Document
45613 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45617 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45620 Update Master Document
45621 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45628 menu or the toolbar.
45629 The default is set in
45631 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45632 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
45634 \begin_inset space ~
45637 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
45641 \begin_inset space ~
45645 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45647 reference "sec:File-Formats"
45654 \begin_layout Description
45656 \begin_inset space ~
45660 \begin_inset space ~
45663 Output settings for the menu
45665 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
45667 \begin_inset space ~
45673 For a detailed description see section
45675 Reverse DVI/PDF search
45680 \begin_inset space ~
45688 \begin_layout Description
45690 \begin_inset space ~
45694 \begin_inset space ~
45697 Options offers settings for the export format
45705 \begin_inset space ~
45710 will assure that the output follows exactly version
45711 \begin_inset space ~
45714 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
45718 \begin_inset space ~
45723 settings are described in detail in section
45725 Math Output in XHTML
45730 \begin_inset space ~
45739 \begin_inset space ~
45743 \begin_inset space ~
45748 is used for the size of equations in the output.
45751 \begin_layout Description
45753 \begin_inset space ~
45758 Save transient properties
45760 controls whether document settings that are frequently switched or that
45761 are specific to the user are saved with the document.
45762 The properties that are affected by option are currently:
45766 \begin_layout Itemize
45767 the activation of change tracking
45770 \begin_layout Itemize
45771 the output of tracked changes
45774 \begin_layout Itemize
45775 the recording of the document directory path.
45778 \begin_layout Standard
45779 Disabling the option can prevent issues in collaborative work and/or when
45780 using a version control system (for instance unnecessary merge conflicts).
45784 \begin_layout Section
45792 \begin_layout Standard
45793 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
45795 define \SpecialChar LaTeX
45797 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
45799 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
45803 \begin_layout Standard
45804 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45805 -syntax is given in section
45806 \begin_inset space ~
45810 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45812 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
45819 \begin_layout Chapter
45825 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45827 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
45832 \begin_inset Index idx
45835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45844 \begin_layout Standard
45845 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
45847 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45851 It has the following submenus.
45854 \begin_layout Section
45858 \begin_layout Subsection
45862 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45863 User Interface File
45864 \begin_inset Index idx
45867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45868 Customization ! of toolbars
45874 \begin_inset Index idx
45877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45878 Customization ! of menus
45886 \begin_layout Standard
45887 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
45888 interface (ui) file.
45889 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
45897 \begin_layout Description
45902 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
45905 \begin_layout Description
45912 the menu entries in popup context menus
45915 \begin_layout Description
45920 specifies the toolbar buttons
45923 \begin_layout Standard
45924 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
45925 and edit the entries.
45928 \begin_layout Standard
45929 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
45941 entries must be finished with an explicit
45966 and in the case of the
45967 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45971 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45979 The syntax for the entries is:
45982 \begin_layout Standard
45983 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
45989 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45997 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46001 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46006 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46012 \begin_layout Standard
46014 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
46017 All the \SpecialChar LyX
46018 -functions are listed in the menu
46020 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
46022 \begin_inset space ~
46030 \begin_layout Standard
46031 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
46037 \begin_layout Standard
46038 For example, assuming you use the menu
46040 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
46043 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
46047 \begin_layout Standard
46048 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
46054 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46058 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46062 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46066 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46072 \begin_layout Standard
46074 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
46078 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46082 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46089 to have the sixth bookmark.
46092 \begin_layout Standard
46096 \begin_inset space ~
46101 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
46102 's toolbar buttons.
46103 The currently available icon sets are compared in
46104 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46107 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
46115 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46119 \begin_layout Standard
46122 Enable tool tips in main work area
46124 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
46128 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46132 \begin_layout Standard
46137 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
46138 should display in the menu
46140 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
46142 \begin_inset space ~
46150 \begin_layout Subsection
46154 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46158 \begin_layout Standard
46161 Restore window layouts and geometries
46164 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in
46165 the last \SpecialChar LyX
46169 \begin_layout Standard
46172 Restore cursor positions
46174 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
46178 \begin_layout Standard
46181 Load opened files from last session
46183 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
46187 \begin_layout Standard
46190 Clear all session information
46192 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
46193 sessions (cursor positions, names
46194 of last opened documents, etc.).
46197 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46199 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46201 name "subsec:Backup documents"
46206 \begin_inset Index idx
46209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46218 \begin_layout Standard
46221 Backup original documents when saving
46223 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
46224 it was saved the last time.
46225 It is stored in the
46228 \begin_inset space ~
46234 \begin_inset space ~
46238 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46240 reference "sec:Paths"
46244 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
46247 \begin_inset space ~
46253 The backup file has the file extension
46254 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46262 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46268 \begin_layout Standard
46271 Backup documents, every
46273 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
46276 \begin_layout Standard
46279 Save documents compressed by default
46281 always saves files in a compressed format (see also section
46282 \begin_inset space ~
46286 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46288 reference "subsec:Compressed"
46293 This applies to newly created documents only.
46294 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving.
46297 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46298 Windows & work area
46301 \begin_layout Standard
46304 Open documents in tabs
46306 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
46310 \begin_layout Standard
46315 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
46320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46322 \begin_inset space ~
46326 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46328 reference "sec:Paths"
46332 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
46339 If it is checked, \SpecialChar LyX
46340 documents will be opened in the same running instance
46341 of \SpecialChar LyX
46343 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
46344 instance is created for each file.
46347 \begin_layout Standard
46350 Single close-tab button
46352 is checked, there will only be one close button (
46362 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
46363 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
46364 Regardless of this option, one can always close a tab by middle-clicking
46368 \begin_layout Standard
46369 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
46372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46377 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
46378 before the change takes effect.
46386 \begin_layout Standard
46391 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
46393 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
46395 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
46399 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
46400 instances of \SpecialChar LyX
46401 and only want to close the view in once instance.
46404 \begin_layout Subsection
46406 \begin_inset Index idx
46409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46416 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46418 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
46425 \begin_layout Standard
46426 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
46430 \begin_layout Standard
46431 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
46434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46439 This section only deals with the fonts
46443 the \SpecialChar LyX
46445 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
46448 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46449 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
46460 \begin_layout Standard
46461 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
46478 (depends on the system) as its
46481 \begin_inset space ~
46497 \begin_layout Standard
46498 You can change the font size with the
46505 \begin_layout Standard
46510 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
46512 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46515 points have the size of 1
46516 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46520 \begin_inset space ~
46524 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46526 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
46531 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
46532 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46536 The sizes are explained in detail in section
46537 \begin_inset space ~
46541 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46543 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
46550 \begin_layout Subsection
46552 \begin_inset Index idx
46555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46556 Color ! \SpecialChar LyX
46563 \begin_inset Index idx
46566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46575 \begin_layout Standard
46576 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
46577 by choosing an item in the
46578 list and selecting the
46585 \begin_layout Standard
46586 By checking the option
46590 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
46593 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
46594 \begin_inset space ~
46598 \begin_inset space ~
46603 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
46606 \begin_layout Subsection
46608 \begin_inset Index idx
46611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46620 \begin_layout Standard
46621 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
46625 \begin_layout Standard
46630 enables previewing snippets of your document.
46631 This feature is described in section
46632 \begin_inset space ~
46636 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46638 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
46645 \begin_layout Standard
46646 Checking the option
46649 \begin_inset space ~
46653 \begin_inset space ~
46657 \begin_inset space ~
46662 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
46665 \begin_layout Section
46667 \begin_inset Index idx
46670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46679 \begin_layout Subsection
46683 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46687 \begin_layout Standard
46690 Cursor follows scrollbar
46692 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
46696 \begin_layout Standard
46697 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
46698 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
46699 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
46702 \begin_layout Standard
46705 Scroll below end of document
46707 is self-explanatory.
46710 \begin_layout Standard
46711 In \SpecialChar LyX
46712 one can jump from word to word by pressing
46719 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
46721 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
46722 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
46725 \begin_layout Standard
46728 Sort environments alphabetically
46730 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
46733 \begin_layout Standard
46736 Group environments by their category
46738 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
46741 \begin_layout Standard
46746 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
46757 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46761 \begin_layout Standard
46762 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
46767 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
46768 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
46772 \begin_layout Subsection
46774 \begin_inset Index idx
46777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46784 \begin_inset Index idx
46787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46788 Settings ! Shortcuts
46796 \begin_layout Standard
46801 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
46803 Several binding files are available, among them:
46806 \begin_layout Description
46807 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
46810 \begin_layout Description
46811 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
46823 \begin_layout Description
46824 mac.bind a set of bindings for
46827 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46835 \begin_layout Standard
46836 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
46841 , and binding files for special languages.
46842 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
46843 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46847 \begin_inset space \space{}
46851 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46855 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46859 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
46860 in a certain language, \SpecialChar LyX
46861 will try to use the appropriate binding
46865 \begin_layout Standard
46866 Some binding files, like
46870 , only have a limited scope.
46871 When looking at the end of the file
46875 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
46878 \begin_layout Standard
46882 \begin_inset space ~
46886 \begin_inset space ~
46891 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
46892 in the selected key binding file.
46895 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46897 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46899 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
46904 \begin_inset Index idx
46907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46908 Key Bindings ! Editing
46916 \begin_layout Standard
46917 To add new or modify existing key bindings to your own taste you can use
46918 the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
46919 functions and the bound shortcuts.
46920 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
46923 Show key-bindings containing
46926 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
46927 Insert there for example as keyword
46928 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46932 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46935 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
46936 functions that contain
46937 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46941 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46945 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
46946 All \SpecialChar LyX
46947 functions are also listed in the file
46952 that you will find in the
46959 \begin_layout Standard
46960 For example, to add the shortcut
46968 , select the function and press the
46973 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
46974 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
46977 \begin_layout Standard
46978 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
46979 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
46981 definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the different
46982 function names as a semicolon separated list.
46984 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
46989 \begin_layout Standard
46990 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
46993 \begin_layout Standard
46994 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
46996 The syntax of the entries is:
46999 \begin_layout Standard
47005 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47009 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47013 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47018 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47024 \begin_layout Standard
47025 Note, though, that the key combination definition uses a specific syntax.
47026 This applies to the designators of specific modifier keys (e.
47027 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47054 , respectively) as well as to the other keys.
47055 Note particularly that you cannot use non-alphanumeric characters directly
47056 in the definition of the key combination, but must use commands following
47057 the Xlib standard instead (please refer to the existing bind files for
47059 So if you wanted to bind a command to the key combination
47063 , you needed to specify it as
47068 If you use the dialog to edit key bindings, you don't have to care for
47071 transforms your input to the correct syntax.
47074 \begin_layout Subsection
47076 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47078 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
47083 \begin_inset Index idx
47086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47093 \begin_inset Index idx
47096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47097 Settings ! Keyboard Map
47105 \begin_layout Standard
47106 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
47107 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, \SpecialChar LyX
47108 provides keyboard maps.
47109 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
47110 is a Romanian one, you can enable
47113 \begin_inset space ~
47117 \begin_inset space ~
47122 and select the keyboard map file named
47129 \begin_layout Standard
47138 keyboard map and, if you use the
47142 bindings, you can select the first and second with
47145 arg "keymap-primary"
47151 arg "keymap-secondary"
47154 respectively or toggle between them with
47157 arg "keymap-toggle"
47163 \begin_layout Standard
47164 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
47167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47172 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
47181 \begin_layout Standard
47182 You can also specify the mouse
47184 Wheel scrolling speed
47187 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
47191 Middle mouse button pasting
47193 you can determine if pressing the middle mouse button (or the mouse wheel)
47194 inserts the content of the clipboard.
47197 \begin_layout Standard
47205 \begin_inset space ~
47209 \begin_inset space ~
47214 you can select a key for zooming.
47215 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
47218 \begin_layout Subsection
47222 \begin_layout Standard
47223 Input completion is described in section
47224 \begin_inset space ~
47228 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47230 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
47237 \begin_layout Section
47239 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47246 \begin_inset Index idx
47249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47256 \begin_inset Index idx
47259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47268 \begin_layout Standard
47269 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
47270 are normally determined during
47272 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
47275 \begin_layout Description
47277 \begin_inset space ~
47280 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
47281 's working directory.
47282 It is the default when you
47293 \begin_inset space ~
47301 \begin_layout Description
47303 \begin_inset space ~
47306 templates This directory will be opened when you use the menu
47308 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
47310 \begin_inset space ~
47314 \begin_inset space ~
47322 \begin_layout Description
47324 \begin_inset space ~
47327 files This directory will be opened when you use the button
47333 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
47337 \begin_inset Newline newline
47341 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
47344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47353 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
47354 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
47362 \begin_layout Description
47364 \begin_inset space ~
47368 \begin_inset Index idx
47371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47377 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
47378 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
47379 \begin_inset space ~
47383 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47385 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
47393 will be used to save the backups.
47394 \begin_inset Newline newline
47397 Backup files have the ending
47398 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47402 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47408 \begin_layout Description
47410 \begin_inset space ~
47413 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
47414 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
47416 \begin_inset Newline newline
47423 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
47429 You can edit this file with the program
47438 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
47439 in its preferences under
47442 \begin_inset space ~
47448 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
47453 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
47455 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
47456 in your \SpecialChar LyX
47462 and \SpecialChar LyX
47463 need to be running the same time.
47464 \begin_inset Newline newline
47467 The pipe is also used for the
47471 feature, see section
47472 \begin_inset space ~
47476 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47478 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
47483 \begin_inset Newline newline
47486 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
47487 Server-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
47488 \begin_inset Newline newline
47504 \begin_layout Description
47506 \begin_inset space ~
47509 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
47512 \begin_layout Description
47514 \begin_inset space ~
47517 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
47518 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
47519 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
47522 \begin_layout Description
47524 \begin_inset space ~
47527 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
47533 You only need to specify it if you are using
47537 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
47539 For \SpecialChar LyX
47544 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
47548 \begin_layout Description
47550 \begin_inset space ~
47553 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
47554 When \SpecialChar LyX
47555 needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see where
47556 to find it on the system.
47557 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
47559 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
47561 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47565 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47568 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
47569 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
47572 \begin_layout Description
47574 \begin_inset space ~
47577 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
47578 which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
47579 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
47580 code or in the document
47582 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
47584 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
47585 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
47586 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
47587 scanned for the input files.
47588 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
47589 to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
47591 It is recommended that you always include '.' as one of the paths; otherwise
47592 compilation may fail for some documents.
47595 \begin_layout Section
47599 \begin_layout Standard
47600 Here you can insert your
47609 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
47611 \begin_inset space ~
47615 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47617 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
47621 , to mark changes you make as yours.
47624 \begin_layout Section
47626 \begin_inset Index idx
47629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47630 Language ! Settings
47636 \begin_inset Index idx
47639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47640 Settings ! Language
47648 \begin_layout Subsection
47650 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47652 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
47659 \begin_layout Description
47661 \begin_inset space ~
47665 \begin_inset space ~
47668 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
47670 You can find its actual translation status here:
47671 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47673 target "https://www.lyx.org/I18n"
47681 \begin_layout Description
47683 \begin_inset space ~
47686 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
47687 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
47688 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
47689 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
47690 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47694 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47698 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47702 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47706 The most widespread language package is
47711 \begin_inset Index idx
47714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47721 ; it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
47723 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
47724 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
47725 come with the alternative
47731 \begin_inset Index idx
47734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47736 packages ! polyglossia
47741 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
47742 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
47748 The available selections are described in section
47749 \begin_inset space ~
47753 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47755 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
47762 \begin_layout Description
47764 \begin_inset space ~
47767 start If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
47768 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
47769 you can here specify the command to start the package.
47770 An example is the start command
47776 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
47778 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
47782 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
47798 selectlanguage{$$lang}
47803 \begin_layout Description
47805 \begin_inset space ~
47813 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
47814 command toggles the package on and off.
47817 \begin_layout Description
47819 \begin_inset space ~
47823 \begin_inset space ~
47826 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
47830 \begin_layout Description
47832 \begin_inset space ~
47836 \begin_inset space ~
47839 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
47843 \begin_layout Description
47845 \begin_inset space ~
47849 \begin_inset space ~
47852 globally When this option is set, the languages used in the document will
47853 be added as options to the document class options, so that they can be
47854 used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
47856 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
47863 \begin_layout Description
47865 \begin_inset space ~
47868 begin When this option is set, documents start with the chosen document
47870 When this option is not set, the
47873 \begin_inset space ~
47878 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47880 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
47883 \begin_inset space ~
47891 \begin_layout Description
47893 \begin_inset space ~
47899 \begin_inset space ~
47905 When it is not set, the
47908 \begin_inset space ~
47913 is set to the end of the document.
47916 \begin_layout Description
47918 \begin_inset space ~
47922 \begin_inset space ~
47925 languages Text marked formatted in a language different from the document
47926 language will be underlined in blue.
47929 \begin_layout Description
47931 \begin_inset space ~
47935 \begin_inset space ~
47938 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
47939 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
47942 \begin_layout Description
47944 \begin_inset space ~
47947 movement When writing RTL, you can define if the left and right arrow keys
47948 move the cursor visually to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
47949 Logical means that the cursor is moved to the left when pressing the right
47950 arrow key and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
47953 \begin_layout Subsection
47957 \begin_layout Standard
47958 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
47959 \begin_inset space ~
47963 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47965 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
47972 \begin_layout Section
47976 \begin_layout Subsection
47978 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47980 name "subsec:General-output"
47987 \begin_layout Description
47989 \begin_inset space ~
47992 search Commands that will be used for the menu
47994 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
47996 \begin_inset space ~
48002 For a detailed description see section
48004 Reverse DVI/PDF search
48009 \begin_inset space ~
48017 \begin_layout Description
48019 \begin_inset space ~
48022 Options Options for the program
48026 that is used for the export format
48031 \begin_inset space ~
48035 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48037 reference "subsec:Export"
48042 Possible options are listed in the
48047 \begin_inset Newline newline
48051 \begin_inset Flex URL
48054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48056 https://www.tug.org/texinfohtml/dvips.html
48066 \begin_layout Description
48068 \begin_inset space ~
48072 \begin_inset space ~
48075 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
48078 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
48079 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
48081 \begin_inset space ~
48087 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
48090 \begin_layout Description
48092 \begin_inset space ~
48096 \begin_inset Index idx
48099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48106 \begin_inset Index idx
48109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48110 Settings ! Date format
48115 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
48116 \begin_inset Newline newline
48120 \begin_inset Flex URL
48123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48125 http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/date.1.html
48131 \begin_inset Newline newline
48134 For example the format
48135 \begin_inset Newline newline
48139 \begin_inset Newline newline
48142 prints the date as day/month/year.
48145 \begin_layout Description
48147 \begin_inset space ~
48151 \begin_inset space ~
48154 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
48155 is allowed to overwrite on export.
48158 \begin_layout Subsection
48164 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48166 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
48171 \begin_inset Index idx
48174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48175 Settings ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
48184 \begin_layout Description
48186 \begin_inset space ~
48194 \begin_inset space ~
48198 \begin_inset space ~
48201 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
48206 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
48227 are used for Cyrillic.
48228 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
48229 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48237 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48241 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
48243 sets up in the background.
48244 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
48247 \begin_layout Description
48249 \begin_inset space ~
48253 \begin_inset space ~
48257 \begin_inset space ~
48261 \begin_inset space ~
48264 options They only have an effect when the program
48268 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
48271 \begin_layout Standard
48272 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
48273 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
48274 manuals of the applications.
48277 \begin_layout Description
48279 \begin_inset space ~
48282 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
48283 \begin_inset space ~
48287 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48289 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
48296 \begin_layout Description
48298 \begin_inset space ~
48301 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
48302 \begin_inset space ~
48306 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48308 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
48315 \begin_layout Description
48317 \begin_inset space ~
48320 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
48321 \begin_inset space ~
48325 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48327 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
48334 \begin_layout Description
48340 \begin_inset space ~
48343 command Command for the program
48345 Check\SpecialChar TeX
48348 that is described in the section
48350 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
48355 Additional Features
48360 \begin_layout Standard
48361 There are additionally the following options:
48364 \begin_layout Description
48366 \begin_inset space ~
48370 \begin_inset space ~
48374 \begin_inset space ~
48378 \begin_inset space ~
48383 \begin_inset space ~
48386 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
48387 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48393 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48397 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48401 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48404 to separate folders.
48405 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
48407 \begin_inset Index idx
48410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48417 \begin_inset Index idx
48420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48429 \begin_layout Description
48431 \begin_inset space ~
48435 \begin_inset space ~
48439 \begin_inset space ~
48443 \begin_inset space ~
48447 \begin_inset space ~
48451 \begin_inset space ~
48454 changes Removes all manually set
48460 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
48461 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
48463 \begin_inset space ~
48468 dialog when changing the document class.
48471 \begin_layout Section
48473 \begin_inset space ~
48477 \begin_inset Index idx
48480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48489 \begin_layout Subsection
48491 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48493 name "subsec:Converters"
48498 \begin_inset Index idx
48501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48510 \begin_layout Standard
48511 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
48512 from one format to another.
48513 You can modify converters or create new ones.
48514 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
48521 \begin_inset space ~
48526 field and press the
48531 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
48535 \begin_inset space ~
48540 drop-down list, modify the
48544 field and press the
48551 \begin_layout Standard
48554 Converter File Cache
48560 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
48562 Maximum Age (in days
48565 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
48566 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
48569 \begin_layout Standard
48570 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
48571 definition, is described in the section
48582 \begin_layout Subsection
48584 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48586 name "sec:File-Formats"
48591 \begin_inset Index idx
48594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48601 \begin_inset Index idx
48604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48613 \begin_layout Standard
48614 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
48624 programs that should be used for certain formats.
48627 \begin_layout Standard
48628 You can also define the
48630 Default output format
48632 that is used when you use
48634 View, Update, View Master Document
48638 Update Master Document
48644 menu or the toolbar.
48647 \begin_layout Standard
48648 More about formats and their options is described in the section
48659 \begin_layout Standard
48660 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
48662 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
48663 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
48664 This is done by specifying a
48669 More about this is described in the section
48680 \begin_layout Chapter
48681 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
48683 \begin_inset Index idx
48686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48693 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48695 name "chap:Units-available-in"
48702 \begin_layout Standard
48704 \begin_inset space ~
48708 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48710 reference "tab:Units"
48714 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
48715 and used in this documentation.
48718 \begin_layout Standard
48719 \begin_inset Float table
48725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48726 \begin_inset Caption Standard
48728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48729 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48744 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
48750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48752 \begin_inset Tabular
48753 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="21" columns="3">
48754 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
48755 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
48756 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle" width="50col%">
48757 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
48759 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48768 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48777 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48789 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48798 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48803 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48807 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48815 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48826 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48835 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48840 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48844 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48852 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48863 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48872 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48881 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48892 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48901 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48906 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48910 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
48914 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48922 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48933 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48942 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48955 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48966 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48975 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48988 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48999 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49008 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49017 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49028 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49037 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49046 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49057 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49066 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49071 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49075 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49083 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49094 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49103 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49108 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49112 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49120 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49131 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49140 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49145 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49149 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49157 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49168 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49177 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49181 scaled point (65536
49182 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49186 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49194 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49205 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49214 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49223 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49236 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49245 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49249 % of height between baselines of two subsequent text lines
49254 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49267 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49276 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49285 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49298 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49307 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49316 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49329 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49338 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49347 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49360 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49369 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49373 % of original image width
49378 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49389 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49398 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49407 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49420 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49429 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49438 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49462 \begin_layout Standard
49463 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
49466 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
49473 \begin_layout Bibliography
49474 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49475 LatexCommand bibitem
49482 The \SpecialChar LyX
49484 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49487 target "https://www.lyx.org/Credits"
49493 \begin_inset Newline newline
49497 \begin_inset Flex URL
49500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49502 https://www.lyx.org/Credits
49510 \begin_layout Bibliography
49511 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49512 LatexCommand bibitem
49513 key "latexcompanion"
49518 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
49520 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
49521 Companion Second Edition.
49524 Addison-Wesley, 2004
49527 \begin_layout Bibliography
49528 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49529 LatexCommand bibitem
49535 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
49538 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
49542 Addison-Wesley, 2003
49545 \begin_layout Bibliography
49546 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49547 LatexCommand bibitem
49556 : A Document Preparation System.
49559 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
49562 \begin_layout Bibliography
49563 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49564 LatexCommand bibitem
49574 The \SpecialChar TeX
49578 Addison-Wesley, 1984
49581 \begin_layout Bibliography
49582 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49583 LatexCommand bibitem
49589 The \SpecialChar TeX
49591 \begin_inset Newline newline
49595 \begin_inset Flex URL
49598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49600 http://texcatalogue.ctan.org/bytopic.html
49608 \begin_layout Bibliography
49609 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49610 LatexCommand bibitem
49616 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
49618 \begin_inset Newline newline
49622 \begin_inset Flex URL
49625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49627 http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq/
49635 \begin_layout Bibliography
49636 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49637 LatexCommand bibitem
49644 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49646 name "Documentation"
49647 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
49654 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
49658 \begin_inset Newline newline
49662 \begin_inset Flex URL
49665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49667 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
49675 \begin_layout Bibliography
49676 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49677 LatexCommand bibitem
49684 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49686 name "Documentation"
49687 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
49692 how to use the program
49694 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
49698 \begin_inset Newline newline
49702 \begin_inset Flex URL
49705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49707 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
49715 \begin_layout Bibliography
49716 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49717 LatexCommand bibitem
49724 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49726 name "Documentation"
49727 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf"
49732 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49738 \begin_inset Index idx
49741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49743 packages ! biblatex
49749 \begin_inset Newline newline
49753 \begin_inset Flex URL
49756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49758 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf
49766 \begin_layout Bibliography
49767 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49768 LatexCommand bibitem
49775 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49777 name "Documentation"
49778 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf"
49783 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49789 \begin_inset Index idx
49792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49800 \begin_inset Newline newline
49804 \begin_inset Flex URL
49807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49809 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf
49817 \begin_layout Bibliography
49818 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49819 LatexCommand bibitem
49826 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49828 name "Documentation"
49829 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
49839 \begin_inset Newline newline
49843 \begin_inset Flex URL
49846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49848 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
49856 \begin_layout Bibliography
49857 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49858 LatexCommand bibitem
49859 key "makeindex-man"
49865 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49868 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi"
49878 \begin_inset Newline newline
49882 \begin_inset Flex URL
49885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49887 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi
49895 \begin_layout Bibliography
49896 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49897 LatexCommand bibitem
49904 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49906 name "Documentation"
49907 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
49917 \begin_inset Newline newline
49921 \begin_inset Flex URL
49924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49926 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
49934 \begin_layout Bibliography
49935 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49936 LatexCommand bibitem
49943 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49945 name "Documentation"
49946 target "https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
49951 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
49953 \begin_inset Newline newline
49957 \begin_inset Flex URL
49960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49962 https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
49970 \begin_layout Bibliography
49971 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49972 LatexCommand bibitem
49979 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49981 name "Documentation"
49982 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
49987 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49993 \begin_inset Index idx
49996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50004 \begin_inset Newline newline
50008 \begin_inset Flex URL
50011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50013 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
50021 \begin_layout Bibliography
50022 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50023 LatexCommand bibitem
50030 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50032 name "Documentation"
50033 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
50038 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50044 \begin_inset Index idx
50047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50049 packages ! enumitem
50055 \begin_inset Newline newline
50059 \begin_inset Flex URL
50062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50064 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
50072 \begin_layout Bibliography
50073 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50074 LatexCommand bibitem
50081 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50083 name "Documentation"
50084 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
50089 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50095 \begin_inset Index idx
50098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50100 packages ! fancyhdr
50106 \begin_inset Newline newline
50110 \begin_inset Flex URL
50113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50115 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
50123 \begin_layout Bibliography
50124 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50125 LatexCommand bibitem
50132 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50134 name "Documentation"
50135 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf"
50140 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50146 \begin_inset Index idx
50149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50151 packages ! hyperref
50157 \begin_inset Newline newline
50161 \begin_inset Flex URL
50164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50166 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf
50174 \begin_layout Bibliography
50175 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50176 LatexCommand bibitem
50183 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50185 name "Documentation"
50186 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf"
50191 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50197 \begin_inset Index idx
50200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50202 packages ! microtpye
50208 \begin_inset Newline newline
50212 \begin_inset Flex URL
50215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50217 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf
50225 \begin_layout Bibliography
50226 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50227 LatexCommand bibitem
50234 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50236 name "Documentation"
50237 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
50242 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50248 \begin_inset Index idx
50251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50259 \begin_inset Newline newline
50263 \begin_inset Flex URL
50266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50268 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
50276 \begin_layout Bibliography
50277 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50278 LatexCommand bibitem
50285 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50287 name "Documentation"
50288 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
50293 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50299 \begin_inset Index idx
50302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50304 packages ! prettyref
50310 \begin_inset Newline newline
50314 \begin_inset Flex URL
50317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50319 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
50327 \begin_layout Bibliography
50328 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50329 LatexCommand bibitem
50336 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50338 name "Documentation"
50339 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
50344 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50350 \begin_inset Index idx
50353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50355 packages ! refstyle
50361 \begin_inset Newline newline
50365 \begin_inset Flex URL
50368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50370 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
50378 \begin_layout Bibliography
50379 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50380 LatexCommand bibitem
50387 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50390 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
50395 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50397 \begin_inset Newline newline
50401 \begin_inset Flex URL
50404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50406 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
50414 \begin_layout Bibliography
50415 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50416 LatexCommand bibitem
50423 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50426 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
50431 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50433 \begin_inset Newline newline
50437 \begin_inset Flex URL
50440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50442 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
50450 \begin_layout Bibliography
50451 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50452 LatexCommand bibitem
50459 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50462 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
50467 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50468 for Cyrillic languages:
50469 \begin_inset Newline newline
50473 \begin_inset Flex URL
50476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50478 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
50486 \begin_layout Bibliography
50487 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50488 LatexCommand bibitem
50495 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50498 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
50503 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50505 \begin_inset Newline newline
50509 \begin_inset Flex URL
50512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50514 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
50522 \begin_layout Bibliography
50523 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50524 LatexCommand bibitem
50531 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50534 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
50539 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50541 \begin_inset Newline newline
50545 \begin_inset Flex URL
50548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50550 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
50558 \begin_layout Bibliography
50559 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50560 LatexCommand bibitem
50567 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50570 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
50575 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50577 \begin_inset Newline newline
50581 \begin_inset Flex URL
50584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50586 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
50594 \begin_layout Standard
50595 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
50602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50629 \begin_inset Note Note
50632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50639 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
50640 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
50641 bibliography is the second one:
50649 \begin_layout Standard
50650 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
50651 LatexCommand bibtex
50652 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
50653 options "biblio/alphadin"
50660 \begin_layout Standard
50661 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
50665 \begin_layout Standard
50669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50675 pagedeclaration}[1]{
50678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50684 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
50692 \begin_inset Note Note
50695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50696 This command makes the page number a clickable hyperlink, see sec.
50697 \begin_inset space ~
50701 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50703 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
50715 \begin_layout Standard
50716 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
50717 LatexCommand printnomenclature
50723 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
50724 LatexCommand printindex